Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer and procedure for outputting optical signals from such multiplexer

ABSTRACT

A reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer (ROADM) includes local interfaces at which optical signals of different wavelengths are locally input into the ROADM, and a network interface configured to connect the ROADM to a network from which multiplexed optical signals of different wavelengths are transmitted to the network. In a first configuration, the ROADM is configured to transmit from the network interface to the network multiplexed signals of different wavelengths having a first minimum frequency difference. In a second configuration, the ROADM is configured to transmit from the network interface to the network multiplexed signals of different wavelengths having a second minimum frequency difference. The second minimum frequency difference is greater than the first minimum frequency difference. This arrangement reduces the power of four wave mixing cross products produced when optical signals of three wavelengths are multiplexed and transmitted from the ROADM to NZDSF or DSF fiber types.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/924,732 filed May 30, 2007.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

The present application incorporates by reference the entire contents of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/924,732 filed May 30, 2007.

BACKGROUND

1. Field

Example embodiments disclosed herein relate in general to the field of wavelength division multiplexing and more particularly to a multifunctional and reconfigurable Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) optical node. Example embodiments disclosed herein also relate to an optical node and an optical network including a reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer core device.

2. Related Art

Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) and Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) are technologies that enable a multitude of optical wavelengths of differing frequencies to be transported over a single optical fiber. A DWDM network is constructed by interconnecting multiple DWDM network elements. Each network element typically includes, for example, optical multiplexing equipment, optical de-multiplexing equipment, optical amplifiers, optical power monitors, optical supervisory channel processors, network element control processors, and optical converters.

First generation DWDM network equipment provided the ability to transport a multitude of optical wavelengths between two points over a single pair of optical fibers. These systems are referred to as DWDM point-to-point systems. Second generation DWDM network equipment provided the ability to interconnect DWDM network elements in a “ring” configuration. These elements included two DWDM network interfaces and multiple single wavelength ports used to add and drop wavelengths to and from the DWDM network interfaces. Second generation DWDM network elements provided the ability to “pass” wavelengths directly between their two DWDM network interfaces. However, in order to do this, fiber cables had to be manually interconnected within a system each time a “pass-through” connection was required.

Third generation DWDM network elements included Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexers, referred to as ROADMs. ROADMs provided the ability to remotely reconfigure the DWDM network element. For these systems, wavelengths could be remotely configured to pass through the network element without manual intervention. Since these “third generation” DWDM network elements also included only two DWDM network interfaces, they are referred to as 2-degree network elements. But these “third generation” DWDM network elements connect only a single add-on device to the ROADMs. As a result, while they are reconfigurable, they are not multifunctional, which limits their usefulness.

In addition, these third generation ROADMs may be part of a network that experiences fiber four-wave mixing (FWM), which plagues many networks that transmit an optical signal having three or more wavelengths over a single optical fiber. FWM is the dominant non-linear penalty for non-SMF-28 fiber types, such as TrueWave Classic (TW-C), TrueWave Plus (TW+), TrueWave Reduced Slope (TW-RS) and Large Effective Area Fiber (LEAF). It is caused by non-linearities in the optical fiber over which the optical signal is transmitted. FWM generates deleterious cross-talk products that vary in power and wavelength, depending on system parameters such as fiber slope, fiber zero dispersion wavelength, optical launch power, channel spacing and the number of spans. FWM occurs in optical fibers with non-linear transmission characteristics when three optical signals of different wavelengths are carried on the optical fiber. These non-linearities generate a fourth optical signal from the three original signals, which is called a cross product, a cross-talk product, or a mixing product, that decreases the signal-to-noise ratio of the three original optical signals. If more than three wavelengths are transmitted on the same optical fiber with non-linear transmission characteristics, more than one additional optical signal is generated. The number of additional generated optical signals is equal to the number of possible combinations of three wavelengths from among the total number of wavelengths transmitted on the optical fiber. As a result, FWM increases as the number of transmitted wavelengths increases.

The presence of FWM cross products affects a network in at least two ways. First, the optical power of the generated cross products depletes the optical power of the optical signals transmitted on the network that carry information, and therefore FWM cross products affect channel OSNR (optical signal-to-noise ratio), resulting in a larger than normal power loss over the span of a fiber optic cable. Second, cross products of exactly the same wavelength as optical signals carrying information on the network create coherent interference/crosstalk and produce a significant OSNR margin reduction, which can lead to traffic outages.

Thus, it is useful to have a fourth generation DWDM optical node that is multifunctional in addition to being reconfigurable. In addition, it is useful to have a multifunctional and reconfigurable DWDM node employing a ROADM connected to more than one add-on device to provide multifunctionality. Further, it is useful to have an optical network including a plurality of such optical nodes. In addition, it is also useful to configure both third and fourth generation DWDM network elements, such as ROADMs to reduce any FWM that is generated from the transmission of at least three wavelengths on a single optical fiber in a network to which the third and fourth generation ROADMs belong.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

One or more of the example embodiments provide a ROADM including a plurality of local interfaces at which optical signals of different wavelengths are locally input into the ROADM, and a network interface configured to connect the ROADM to a network from which multiplexed optical signals of different wavelengths are transmitted to the network. In a first configuration, the ROADM is configured to transmit from the network interface to the network multiplexed signals of different wavelengths having a first minimum frequency difference. In a second configuration, the ROADM is configured to transmit from the network interface to the network multiplexed signals of different wavelengths having a second minimum frequency difference, the second minimum frequency difference being greater than the first minimum frequency difference.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a block diagram of an example of a ROADM device.

FIG. 2A is a block diagram of an example of a type-1 light distributor and FIG. 2B is a block diagram of an example of a type-1 light combiner.

FIG. 3A is a block diagram of an example of a type-1A light distributor and FIG. 3B is a block diagram of an example of a type-1A light combiner.

FIG. 4A is a block diagram of an example of a type-2 light distributor and FIG. 4B is a block diagram of an example of a type-2 light combiner.

FIG. 5A is a block diagram of an example of a type-3 light distributor and FIG. 5B is a block diagram of an example of a type-3 light combiner.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of an example of a type-4 light distributor.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an example of a type-4 light combiner.

FIG. 8 is a block diagram of an example of a type-1 ROADM core device.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram of an example of two paired type-1 ROADM core devices making up a 2-degree optical node.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram of an example of two paired type-1 ROADM core devices including type-1A light combiners making up a 2-degree optical node.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram of an example of two paired type-2 ROADM core devices making up a 2-degree optical node.

FIG. 12 is block diagram of an example of a type-3 ROADM core device.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an example of a type-3 ROADM core device connected to an external colored add/drop add-on module, specifically a type-1 ROADM add-on.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram of an example of paired type-3 ROADM core devices each connected to an external colored add/drop add-on module, specifically a type-1 ROADM add-on.

FIG. 15 is a block diagram of an example of a type-3 ROADM core device connected to an external colorless add/drop add-on module.

FIG. 16 is a block diagram of an example of a type-4 ROADM core device including an integrated colored add/drop add-on module.

FIG. 17 is a block diagram of an example of a type-4 ROADM core connected to a colorless add/drop add-on module, specifically a type-1 ROADM core device.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram of an example of a type-4 ROADM core device connected to a colorless add/drop add-on module, specifically a type-1 ROADM core device including optical amplifiers.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an example of four type-4 ROADM core devices connected to each other to form a 4-degree optical node.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram of an example of an optical network in which a 4-degree node interconnects four other nodes together to form two interconnected rings.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram of an example of a type-1A spur add-on module.

FIG. 22 is a block diagram of an example of a type-1B spur add-on module.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram of an example of a type-1A spur terminator.

FIG. 24 is a block diagram of an example of a type-1B spur terminator.

FIG. 25 is a block diagram of an example of a simple coupler module.

FIG. 26 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including two type-4 ROADM core devices and two type-1B spur add-on modules, and the spur end node including two type-1B spur terminators.

FIG. 27 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including six nodes including two spur main nodes and two spur end nodes.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and spur end node, the spur end node including two type-1B spur terminators, and the spur main node including two type-1B spur terminators, two simple coupler modules, and two type-4 ROADM core devices.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices and two type-2 spur add-ons, and the spur end node including two type-2 spur terminators.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices, two type-2 spur add-ons, and two simple coupler modules, and the spur end node including two type-2 spur terminators.

FIG. 31 is an example of a block diagram of an optical blocker.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices and two type-3 spur add-on modules, and the spur end node including two type-TB spur terminators.

FIG. 33 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices and two type-4 spur add-on modules, and the spur end node including two type-2 spur terminators.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices and two type-5 spur add-on modules, and the spur end node including two type-2 spur terminators.

FIG. 35 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices and two spur add-on modules including two type-4 ROADM core devices, and the spur end node including two type-TB spur terminators.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices and two spur add-on modules including two type-4 ROADM core devices, and the spur end node including spur terminators including two type-4 ROADM core devices.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices, two type-TB spur add-on modules, and optical amplifiers, the spur end node including two type-1B spur terminators and optical amplifiers.

FIG. 38 is a schematic block diagram of an example of an optical node including a ROADM core device, a variety of add-on modules connectable to the ROADM core device, and an indication of the degree of the optical node.

FIG. 39 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices, and two spur add-on modules which are two type-4 ROADM core devices, and the spur end node including two spur terminators which are two type-4 ROADM core devices.

FIG. 40 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and two spur end nodes, the spur main node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, and two pairs of type-TB spur add-on modules, each pair connected to one of the two type-4 ROADM core devices, and the spur end nodes each including a pair of type-TB spur terminators.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a ROADM core device and two add-on modules.

FIG. 42 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two ROADM core devices and two add-on modules, each connected to the same ROADM core device.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a type-3 ROADM core device and two add-on modules, one of which is a colorless optical add/drop module, specifically a type-1 ROADM core device.

FIG. 44 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a type-3 ROADM core device and two add-on modules, one of which is a colorless optical add/drop module, specifically a type-1 ROADM core device with optical amplifiers.

FIG. 45 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a type-3 ROADM core device and two add-on modules, one of which is a colorless optical add/drop module, specifically a type-1 ROADM core device and the other of which is a colored optical add/drop module including a type-2 light distributor and a type-2 light combiner.

FIG. 46 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a type-4 ROADM core device and an add-on module.

FIG. 47 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including four type-3 ROADM core devices, each connected to two add-on modules.

FIG. 48 is a block diagram of an example of an optical network including three optical nodes, two of which include two type-3 ROADM core devices, and one of which includes three type-3 ROADM core devices, each ROADM core device connected to two add-on modules.

FIG. 49 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two ROADM core devices each connected to a different type of add-on module.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two ROADM core devices each connected to two different types of add-on modules.

FIG. 51 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two type-3 ROADM core devices each connected to two different types of add-on modules.

FIG. 52 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two type-3 ROADM core devices each connected to colored and colorless add-on modules.

FIG. 53 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, each including a colored add-on module therein and each externally connected to another add-on module.

FIG. 54 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, each including a colored add-on module therein and each externally connected to a colorless add/drop add-on module.

FIG. 55 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, each including a colored add-on module therein and each externally connected to a colorless add-on module, specifically a type-1 ROADM core device.

FIG. 56 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, each including a colored add-on module therein and each externally connected to a colorless add-on module, specifically a type-1 ROADM core device, including a type-4 light distributor and a type-1 light combiner.

FIG. 57 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node including a spur main node and a spur end node, the spur main node including two type-4 ROADM core devices one of which is connected to a type-1A spur add-on, the other of which is connected to a type-1B spur add-on, the spur end node including a type-1A spur terminator and a type-1B spur terminator.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram of an example of an optical network including plural optical nodes, one of which includes a spur main node and a spur end node.

FIGS. 59A through 59H illustrate different examples of optical nodes. More specifically:

FIG. 59A is a block diagram of an example of a spur main node connected to a spur end node, the spur main node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, each including a colored add-on module therein and each externally connected to a spur add-on module, and a colorless add/drop module;

FIG. 59B is a block diagram of an example of an optical node, the node including three type-4 ROADM core devices each connected to each other, and each connected to a colorless add/drop module;

FIG. 59C is a block diagram of an example of a spur main node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices, two colorless add/drop modules, and a spur add-on module;

FIG. 59D is a block diagram of an example of a spur main node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices, one colorless add/drop module, and two spur add-on modules;

FIG. 59E is a block diagram of an example of a spur main node, the spur main node including three type-4 ROADM core devices, and three spur add-on modules;

FIG. 59F is a block diagram of an example of a spur main node, the spur main node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, three colorless add/drop modules, and a spur add-on module;

FIG. 59G is a block diagram of an example of a spur main node, the spur main node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, and four colorless add/drop modules; and

FIG. 59H is a block diagram of an example of a spur main node, the spur main node including two type-4 ROADM core devices, and four spur add-on modules.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node containing two type-1 ROADM cores and four transponders.

FIG. 61 is a block diagram of an example of an optical node containing two type-1 ROADM cores and two transponders.

FIG. 62 is a block diagram of an example embodiment of a network with five nodes.

FIGS. 63A and 63B are block diagrams of an example embodiment of a network with five nodes and a link failure.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram of a node containing three colorless ROADMs and two transponders to perform wavelength translation to suppress FWM, where the transponders are connected to the ROADMs with a direct fiber connection therebetween.

FIG. 65 is a block diagram of a node containing three colorless ROADMs and two transponders to perform wavelength translation to suppress FWM, where the transponders are connected to the ROADMs via an optical switch.

FIGS. 66A and 66B are block diagram of an example embodiment of a network with five nodes that uses two pairs of bidirectional links on the optical fiber that produces FWM.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart of a procedure for inputting and outputting optical signals that can suppress FWM.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart one example embodiment of the details of the unequal-wavelength spacing procedure and the wavelength-spacing-change procedure shown in FIG. 67.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart one example embodiment of a procedure for suppressing FWM when making connections among different nodes of a network using intelligent wavelength assignment, two pairs of bidirectional fibers, wavelength reassignment, and wavelength translation.

To provide a more complete understanding of the invention and features thereof, reference is made to the following description of example embodiments, taken in conjunction with the accompanying figures.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The example embodiments described herein meet the above-identified needs by providing procedures, apparatuses, systems and computer program products for inputting, outputting, receiving, and transmitting optical signals of multiple wavelengths. This description is not intended to limit the application of the example embodiments presented herein. In fact, after reading the following description, it will be apparent to one skilled in the relevant arts how to implement the following example embodiments in alternative embodiments (e.g., involving any apparatus or procedure for processing signals received from and/or transmitted to a network that performs the same or similar functions as the apparatus or procedures discussed below).

The example embodiments disclosed herein are discussed with respect to a DWDM environment. However, it should be understood to one ordinarily skilled in the art that the inventive techniques illustrated by the examples of the disclosed embodiments could be used in other WDM environments, such as a Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing environment, without limitation.

As used in this application, the term “ROADM” is defined as a reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer that is configurable to transmit and receive optical signals of single and multiple wavelengths to and from other optical devices. In some example embodiments, as will be discussed below, a ROADM is configurable to receive an optical signal or signals from an add port thereof and to drop an optical signal or signals at a drop port thereof, although it is not limited thereto. In other example embodiments, as will be discussed below, a ROADM is configurable to receive an optical signal or signals from an add port of a device coupled to the ROADM within the same optical node and to drop an optical signal or signals at a drop port of the coupled device, although it is not limited thereto. In still other example embodiments, as will be discussed below, a ROADM is configurable to transmit a multiple wavelength signal on a subtending output thereof and to receive a multiple wavelength signal on a subtending input thereof, although it is not limited thereto. The subtending inputs and outputs are coupleable to another optical device in the same optical node. But it should be understood that ROADMs are not limited to transmitting multiple wavelength signals to optical devices within the same optical node and to receiving multiple wavelength signals from optical devices within the same optical node. Accordingly, in other example embodiments that will be discussed below, a ROADM receives a multiple wavelength signal from and transmits a multiple wavelength signal to a network node interface that connects to another node. In addition, as used in this application, the term “ROADM core device” or “ROADM core” is a type of ROADM that can be used in an optical network and has a sufficient number of subtending inputs and outputs so as to connect at least two add-on devices thereto. Such a ROADM core device enables the formation of a multifunctional and reconfigurable optical node if the two add-on devices are of different types, thereby providing a plurality of different functions to the ROADM core device. As also used in this application, an add-on device or module, also called a ROADM add-on, is an optical device connectable to a ROADM, via at least one subtending input and one subtending output of the ROADM, and that is configured to transmit optical signals of multiple wavelengths to the ROADM and to receive optical signals of multiple wavelengths from the ROADM. In addition, as used in this application, the terms “network node interface”, “network interface”, “input line interface”, and “DWDM line interface” are used interchangeably and are used to denote the interface between a ROADM in one node and another node to permit optical communication between the two nodes. Various example embodiments described below provide a ROADM and a ROADM core with additional functionality. For example, according the various embodiments of the invention, a ROADM may also be configurable and reconfigurable to 1) receive optical signals of single and multiple wavelengths, divide the received optical signals into a plurality of optical signals and output the plurality of optical signals, 2) combine received optical signals into a single optical signal, and output the single optical signal, 3) receive and process signals of a single wavelength or multiple wavelengths at an add port thereof and/or drop signals of a single wavelength or multiple wavelengths from a drop port thereof, and/or 4) change the subtending output or drop port from which a single-wavelength optical signal is output or dropped and/or change the selection of single-wavelength optical signals originating on different subtending inputs or add ports thereof that are output from subtending outputs or drop ports thereof. But it should be understood that ROADMs are not limited to these functions or the additional functions discussed below, and that it is within the scope of the various example embodiments for the ROADMs described herein to include additional and/or alternative functions. It should also be understood that ROADMs are not limited to performing all of the functions noted above and discussed below, but are configurable to perform any subset of the above and below discussed functions.

FIG. 1 illustrates an example embodiment of a ROADM 10. The ROADM 10 includes a light distributor 12, a light combiner 14, a plurality of subtending outputs 16, and a plurality of subtending inputs 18. However, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the ROADM 10 to include a plurality of light distributors 12 and a plurality of light combiners 14. The light distributor 12 can include a primary input interface 20, also called a primary input 20, while the light combiner 14 can include a primary output interface 22, also called a primary output 22. The ROADM 10 can constitute part of or an entire optical node. In these cases, the primary input interface 20 of the light distributors 12 can receive optical signals from a primary output of the ROADM of another optical node and the primary output interface 22 of the light combiners 14 can transmit optical signals to a primary input of the ROADM of another optical node. The light distributors 12 can be used to distribute (in some manner as known to those skilled in the art) the light arriving on the primary input 20 to the subtending outputs 16. The light combiners 14 can be used to combine (in some manner as known to those skilled in the art) the light arriving on the subtending inputs 18 to the primary output 22. Any of multiple types of light combiners, and any of multiple types of light distributors can be used in accordance with example embodiments, as will be described below. ROADM 10 can be provided with a network node interface (not shown) through which it transmits multiple-wavelength optical signals to and receives multiple-wavelength signals from another optical node.

Types of Light Combiners and Light Distributors

FIG. 2A shows an example embodiment of a type-1 light distributor 24. The type-1 light distributor 24 can route a portion of the total amount of light entering at a primary input y_(in) 26 to each of subtending outputs 28, which are individually denoted as x₁, x₂ . . . x_(k), where k is the total number of subtending outputs. Expressed in another way, x₁ represents the ith subtending output, where “i” ranges from 1 to k. For the case of an “even” distributor, an equal amount of light is diverted from the primary input y_(in) 26 to each of the subtending outputs (x₁, x₂ . . . x_(k)) 28. For instance, for the case of an “even” 1-to-2 light distributor having two subtending outputs x₁ and x₂, half of the light at the primary input y_(in) 26 is diverted to subtending output x₁ and half of the light is diverted to subtending output x₂. In general, the amount of optical power P_(x) _(i) at any given output x_(i) of k total outputs can be determined by the formula P_(x) _(i) =b_(i)P_(y) _(in) (where P is the amount of optical power applied to primary input y_(in), b_(i) represents the scaling coefficient of the light distributor for output x_(i), and

$\left. {{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}b_{i}} = 1} \right).$ Therefore, for the case of an 50/50 light distributor, 50 percent of the light is sent to output x₁ (b₁=0.5) and 50 percent of the light is sent to output x₂ (b₂=0.5). In reality, an actual light distributor is not ideal and the light from the primary input y_(in) 26 may not always be perfectly coupled into the subtending outputs 28, so that a small error term (e_(i)) may be associated with each output x_(i) of the type-1 light distributor. Therefore, for the non-ideal light distributor, P_(x) _(i) =b_(i)P_(y) _(in) −e_(i). It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1 light distributor 24 to be constructed such that an uneven proportion of light from the primary input y_(in) 26 is directed to each of the subtending outputs 28 so that the amount of light output on each subtending output 28 is not identical. Therefore, for the case of an ideal 80/20 light distributor, 80 percent of the light is sent to output x₁ (b₁=0.8) and 20 percent of the light is sent to output x₂ (b₂=0.2). It is also within the scope of this example embodiment for the type-1 light distributor 24 to operate without being programmed with the knowledge of the frequencies (wavelengths) associated with the light upon which it operates. The type-1 light distributor 24 is also called an optical power divider or an optical splitter.

FIG. 2B shows an example embodiment of a type-1 light combiner 30. The type-1 light combiner 30 shown in FIG. 2B can be configured to combine the light from subtending inputs 32 and direct the optical power associated with those subtending inputs 32 to a primary output, y_(out) 34. The subtending inputs 32 are individually identified as x₁, x₂ . . . x_(k), k in this case being the total number of subtending inputs 32. Expressed in another way, x_(i) in this example represents the ith subtending input, where “i” ranges from 1 to k. In an example of a ROADM core device including a type-1 light combiner 30, the total number of subtending inputs can be the same as the total number of subtending outputs. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the total number of subtending inputs to be different than the total number of subtending outputs. In addition, in one example embodiment, the light combiner 30 can be an “even” combiner, in which the percentage of light sent to the primary output y_(out) 34 from each of the subtending inputs 32 is equal. For the case of an “even” 1-to-2 light combiner 30, half of the light output from the primary output y_(out) 34 comes from the subtending input x₁, and half of the light output from the primary output y_(out) 34 comes from the subtending input x₂. In general, for the case of a k input light combiner, the amount of optical power P_(y) _(out) at output y_(out) can be determined by the formula

$P_{y_{out}} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}{b_{i}P_{x_{i}}}}$ (where b_(i) represents the scaling coefficient of the light combiner for input x_(i),

${{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}b_{i}} = 1},$ an P_(x) _(i) is the power applied to input x_(i)). In reality, though, for a non-ideal light combiner, the light from the subtending inputs 32 may not always be perfectly coupled into the primary output 34, so that a small error term (e) may be associated with the type-1 light combiner 30. Therefore, for the non-ideal light combiner

$P_{y_{out}} = {{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}{b_{i}P_{x_{i}}}} - {e.}}$ It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1 light combiner 30 to be also constructed such that an uneven proportion of light is directed from each of the subtending inputs 32 to the light combiner output 34. As a result, the primary output may receive a different percentage of light from each subtending input. Therefore, for the case of an ideal 70/30 light combiner, 70 percent of the light from input x₁ is coupled to y_(out) (b₁=0.7) and 30 percent of the light from input x₂ is coupled to your (b₂=0.3). It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1 light combiner 30 to operate without being programmed with the knowledge of the frequencies (wavelengths) associated with the light upon which it operates. The type-1 light combiner 30 is also called an optical power adder or an optical coupler.

FIG. 3A shows an example of a type-1A light distributor 36. The type-1A light distributor 36 can route a portion of the total amount of light entering at a primary input y_(in) 38 to each of subtending outputs 40, which are individually denoted as x₁, x₂ . . . x_(k), k being the total number of subtending outputs. Expressed in another way, x_(i) in this case represents the ith subtending output, where “i” ranges from 1 to k. Each subtending output 40 includes a variable optical attenuator (VOA) 42. Each VOA 42 can enable the light exiting a given subtending output to be further attenuated by some adjustable amount denoted by a_(i), where “a” represents a coefficient of attenuation and “i” represents a particular subtending output 40 and ranges from 1 to k, where k is the total number of subtending outputs. Thus, for example, a₁ is the coefficient of attenuation applied to the 1^(st) subtending output 40, which is denoted by x₁. Each VOA 42 can also allow the light exiting a given subtending output to be completely extinguished. In this case, the coefficient of attenuation takes the value of 0. Each VOA 42 can be adjusted independently from all other VOAs 42, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment, to provide interdependent control of the VOAs 42. A control signal associated with each subtending output 40 of the type-1A light distributor 36 can be used to set the attenuation value of each VOA 42, as is known to those skilled in the art. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for each subtending output 40 to include a VOA 42, and it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for fewer than all of the subtending output 40 to include a VOA 42 and for any number of subtending outputs 409 to include a VOA 42. For the case of an “even” light distributor, an equal amount of light is diverted from the primary input y_(in) 38 to each of the subtending outputs x₁, x₂ . . . x_(k). For instance, for the case of an “even” 1-to-2 light distributor having two subtending outputs x₁ and x₂, half of the light at the primary input y_(in) 38 is diverted to subtending output x₁, and half of the light is diverted to subtending output x₂. In general the amount of optical power P_(x) _(i) at any given output x_(i) of k total outputs can be determined by the formula P_(x)=a_(i)b_(i)P_(y) _(in) (where P_(y) _(in) is the amount of optical power applied to primary input y_(in), b_(i) represents the scaling coefficient of the light distributor for output x_(i), a_(i) represents the coefficient of attenuation for output x_(i), 0≦a_(i)≦1, and

$\left. {{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}b_{i}} = 1} \right).$ Therefore, for the case of an 50/50 light distributor (k=2) with the VOA of output x₁ set to attenuate its input signal by 60% and with the VOA of output x₂ set to attenuate its input signal by 70%, 20 percent of the light from is sent to output x₁ (b₁=0.5, a₁=0.4) and 15 percent of the light from P_(y) _(in) is sent to output x₂ (b₂=0.5, a₂=0.3). In reality, an actual light distributor is not ideal and the light from the primary input y_(in) 38 may not always be perfectly coupled into the subtending outputs 40, so that a small error term (e_(i)) may be associated with each output of the type-1A light distributor 36. Therefore, for the non-ideal light distributor, P_(x) _(i) =a_(i)b_(i)P_(y) _(in) −e_(i). It is within the scope of the invention, in an example embodiment, for the type-1A light distributor 36 to be constructed such that an uneven proportion of light from the primary input y_(in) 38 is directed to each of the subtending outputs 40 so that the amount of light output on each subtending output 40 is not identical (assuming the attenuation coefficients a_(i) are the same). It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1A light distributor 36 to operate without being programmed with the knowledge of the frequencies (wavelengths) associated with the light upon which it operates. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1A distributor 36 to be identical to its type-1 equivalent, except that the VOA 42 is inserted in each subtending output. And it also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1A distributor 36 to be different from its type-1 equivalent in ways in addition to the use of the VOA. The type-1A light distributor 36 is also called an optical power divider with VOAs or an optical splitter with VOAs.

FIG. 3B shows an example embodiment of a type-1A light combiner 44. The type-1A light combiner shown in FIG. 3B can be configured to attenuate light from subtending inputs 46 using variable optical attenuators (VOAs) 48, combine the attenuated light from the subtending inputs 46, and direct the optical power associated with those subtending inputs 46 to a primary output, your 50. Each VOA 48 can enable the light entering the light combiner 44 on a given subtending input to be attenuated by some adjustable amount denoted by a_(i), where “a” represents a coefficient of attenuation and “i” represents a particular subtending input 46 and ranges from 1 to k, where k is the total number of subtending inputs; thus, for example, a₁ is the coefficient of attenuation applied to the 1^(st) subtending input 46, which is denoted by x₁, and a₂ is the coefficient of attenuation applied to the 2^(nd) subtending input 46, which is denoted by x₂. Expressed in another way, x_(i) in this case represents the ith subtending input, where “i” ranges from 1 to k. Each VOA 48 can also enable the light entering the light combiner 44 on a given subtending input to be completely extinguished. In this case, the coefficient of attenuation takes the value of 0. Each VOA 48 can be adjusted independently from all other VOAs 48, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment, to provide interdependent control of the VOAs 48. A control signal associated with each subtending input 46 of the type-1A light combiner 44 can be used to set the attenuation value of each VOA 48. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for each subtending input 46 to include a VOA 48, and it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for fewer than all of the subtending inputs 46 to include a VOA 48 and for any number of subtending inputs 46 to include a VOA 48. In addition, in a ROADM core device including a type-1A light combiner 44, the total number of subtending inputs can be the same as the total number of subtending outputs. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the total number of subtending inputs in a ROADM core device to be different than the total number of subtending outputs. In addition, the light combiner 44 can be an “even” combiner, in which the percentage of light sent to the primary output your 50 from each of the subtending inputs 46 is equal. For the case of an “even” 2-to-1 light combiner 44, half of the light output from the primary output your 50 comes from the subtending input x₁, and half of the light output from the primary output your 50 comes from the subtending input x₂. In general, for the case of a k input type 1A light combiner, the amount of optical power P at output your can be determined by the formula

$P_{y_{out}} = {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}{b_{i}a_{i}P_{x_{i}}}}$ (where b_(i) represents the scaling coefficient of the light combiner for input x_(i), a_(i) represents the coefficient of attenuation for input x_(i), 0≦a_(i)≦1,

${{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}b_{i}} = 1},$ and P_(x) _(i) is the power applied to input x_(i)). In reality though, for a non-ideal light combiner, the light from the subtending inputs 46 may not always be perfectly coupled into the primary output 50, so that a small error term (e) may be associated with the type-1A light combiner 44. Therefore, for the non-ideal type 1A light combiner

$P_{y_{out}} = {{\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{k}{b_{i}a_{i}P_{x_{i}}}} - {e.}}$ It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1A light combiner 44 to be also constructed such that an uneven proportion of light is directed from each of the subtending inputs 46 to the light combiner output 50. As a result, in this example embodiment, the primary output may receive a different percentage of light from each subtending input. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1A light combiner 44 to operate without being programmed with the knowledge of the frequencies (wavelengths) associated with the light upon which it operates. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1A light combiner 44 to be identical to its type-1 equivalent shown in FIG. 2B, except that the VOA 48 is inserted in each subtending input 46 in the type-1A light combiner 44. In addition, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1A light combiner 44 to be different from its type-1 equivalent shown in FIG. 2B in ways in addition to the use of the VOA. The type-1A light combiner 44 is also called an optical power adder with VOAs or an optical coupler with VOAs.

FIG. 4A shows an example embodiment of a type-2 light distributor 52. The type-2 light distributor 52 can be configured to demultiplex individual wavelengths from a composite wavelength division multiplexed light stream including m multiple wavelengths denoted as λ₁, λ₂, . . . λ_(m), where m represents the total number of wavelengths in the stream. A wavelength division multiplexed (WDM) light stream or a dense wavelength division multiplexed (DWDM) light stream can be applied to the primary input 54 of the type-2 light distributor 52. The type-2 light distributor 52 is then able to divert particular wavelengths to particular subtending outputs 56, depending upon its design. In the FIG. 4A example, a DWDM signal including wavelengths λ₁ to λ_(m) is applied to the type-2 light distributor 52, and the light distributor 52 directs wavelength λ₁ to subtending output 1, wavelength λ₂ to subtending output 2, and more generally, directs wavelength λ_(m) to subtending output m. For the type-2 light distributor 52, a given wavelength is directed to a pre-defined and predetermined subtending output 56. There may be an inherent insertion power loss associated with the path each wavelength takes from the primary input 54 to its corresponding subtending output 56. While one example embodiment employs the same number of wavelengths as the number of subtending outputs 56, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the number of wavelengths to differ from the number of subtending outputs 56.

FIG. 4B shows an example of a type-2 light combiner 58, which can be used to multiplex individual wavelengths, such as λ₁, λ₂, . . . , λ_(m), arriving on individual subtending inputs 60 in order to form a composite wavelength division multiplexed light stream on primary output 62 including light of the multiple wavelengths λ₁, λ₂, . . . , λ_(m) (m in this case being an integer representing the total number of wavelengths input into the light combiner 58). A single predefined wavelength is applied to each subtending input 60 of the type-2 light combiner 58. In the FIG. 4B example, wavelength λ₁ is applied to subtending input 1, wavelength λ₂ is applied to subtending input 2, and wavelength λ_(m) is applied to subtending input m. The resulting light stream exiting from the primary output 62 then includes a DWDM signal including wavelengths λ₁ through λ_(m). There may be an inherent insertion power loss associated with the path each wavelength takes from its subtending input 60 to the primary output 62. An example of a physical component that performs wavelength multiplexing or wavelength demultiplexing is an Arrayed Waveguide Grating (AWG). While one example embodiment employs the same number of wavelengths as the number of subtending inputs 60, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the number of wavelengths to differ from the number of subtending inputs 60. In another example embodiment, in a ROADM core device including a type-2 light combiner 58, the total number of subtending inputs can be the same as the total number of subtending outputs. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the total number of subtending inputs of such a ROADM core device to be different than the total number of subtending outputs.

FIG. 5A shows an example of a type-3 light distributor 64. The type-3 light distributor 64 can be configured to direct the light arriving on the primary input 66 to only one of the k subtending outputs 68 (in this instance, k is an integer denoting the total number of subtending outputs 68). The type-3 light distributor 64 can be programmed in a manner known to those skilled in the art to direct the light arriving at the primary input 66 to any of the k subtending outputs 68. For instance, all the light arriving at the primary input 66 could first be directed to subtending output 1, and then at some time later, the distributor 64 could be programmed or reconfigured such that all the light arriving at the primary input 66 could then be directed to subtending output 2. To accomplish this task, a control signal can be associated with the type-3 light distributor 64 to program the type-3 light distributor 64 to direct the light arriving on the primary input 66 to a selected one of the subtending outputs 68. This type-3 light distributor 64 is also called a 1-to-k optical switch.

FIG. 5B shows an example of a type-3 light combiner 70 that can be configured to direct the light from only one of its subtending inputs 72 to its primary output 74. The type-3 light combiner 70 can be programmed in ways known to those skilled in the art to direct the light arriving on any of its k subtending inputs 72 to its primary output 74 (in this example embodiment, k is an integer denoting the total number of subtending inputs 72). For instance, all the light arriving on subtending input 1 could first be directed to the primary output 74, and then at some time later, the light arriving on subtending input 1 can be prevented from being directed to the primary output 74, and instead, all the light arriving on subtending input 2 can be directed to the primary output 74. To accomplish this task, a control signal can be associated with a type-3 light combiner, as is known to those skilled in the art. The control signal is used to program or reconfigure the combiner 70 to direct the light arriving on one of the subtending inputs 72 to the primary output 74. This type-3 light combiner is also called a k-to-1 optical switch. Both the type-3 light distributor 64 and the type-3 light combiner 70 may have an inherent optical insertion loss (IL) associated with the paths through them. In one example embodiment, in a ROADM core device including a type-3 light combiner 70, the total number of subtending inputs is the same as the total number of subtending outputs. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the total number of subtending inputs to be different than the total number of subtending outputs.

The functions provided by the type 1, 2, and 3 light distributors and by the type 1, 2, and 3 light combiners can be further combined to form more complex light distributors and light combiners. FIGS. 6 and 7 illustrate examples of such elements.

FIG. 6 shows an example of a type-4 light distributor 76. The type-4 light distributor 76 can include a type-2 light distributor 78, type-2 light combiners 80, type-3 light distributors 82, and VOAs 84 positioned between the type-2 light distributor 78 and the type-3 light distributors 82. The type-2 light distributor 78, the type-2 light combiners 80, the type-3 light distributors 82, and the VOAs 84 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light distributor 52, the type-2 light combiner 58, the type-3 light distributor 64, and the VOAs 42, respectively, shown in FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5A, and 3A, although they are not limited thereto. In addition, a control signal associated with each VOA 84 can be used to set the attenuation value of each VOA 84. The type-4 light distributor 76 can be configured and programmed to direct each wavelength arriving in the light stream entering the primary input 86 to only one of the type-2 light combiners 80 and its associated subtending output 81, which are individually denoted by 1 through k (k being an integer representing the total number of subtending outputs in this case). This is accomplished by 1) receiving a multiple-wavelength signal, composed of multiple wavelengths up to m wavelengths (λ₁, λ₂, . . . λ_(m)), with the type-2 light distributor 78 on the primary input 86 (m representing the total number of wavelengths within the light stream entering the primary input 86), 2) separating the multiple-wavelength signal into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-2 light distributor 78, 3) individually attenuating each single-wavelength optical signal output from the type-2 light distributor 78 with a corresponding VOA 84, 4) directing each attenuated single-wavelength optical signal to a different and corresponding type-3 light distributor 82, 5) assigning each attenuated single-wavelength optical signal to only one of the type-2 light combiners 80 using its corresponding type-3 light distributor 82, so that different sets of attenuated single-wavelength optical signals can be directed to different type-3 light combiners 80, 6) combining optical signals in each set of assigned, attenuated, single-wavelength optical signals output from the type-3 light distributors 82 into a single output signal with one of the type-2 light combiners 80, and 7) outputting each single output signal from the type-2 light combiner 80 on its associated subtending output 81. The 1-to-k optical switches 82 can be programmable to direct an optical signal input thereinto to any one of the type-2 light combiners 80 and their associated subtending outputs 81. As illustrated in FIG. 6, up to m wavelengths can be included within the light stream entering the primary input 86, and up to m wavelengths can exit any given subtending output 81. The subtending outputs 81 are individually denoted by the phrase “subtending output 1”, “subtending output 2”, . . . “subtending output k”, where k denotes the total number of subtending outputs. As noted above, the 1-to-k optical switches 82 can direct a given wavelength applied thereto to only one type-2 light combiner 80 and only one subtending output 81. Therefore, for example, if wavelength λ₂ is directed to subtending output 1, then it cannot simultaneously be directed to subtending output 2, for instance, or any other subtending output. In addition, the light distributor 76 can be programmed to attenuate the optical power of each wavelength using the VOA 84 associated with that wavelength before it is directed to a given subtending output 81 by one of the 1-to-k optical switches 82. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the VOA 84 associated with a given wavelength to be programmed such that the wavelength is blocked from exiting any of the subtending outputs. Further, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 light distributor 76 not to include the VOAs 84. And it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the light distributor 76 to include more or fewer than the number of type-2 light distributors 78, VOAs 84, type-3 light distributors 82, and type-2 light combiners 80 shown in FIG. 6. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 light distributor to include additional elements not shown in FIG. 6. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-2 light distributor 78, the VOAs 84, the type-3 light distributors 82, and the type-2 light combiners 80 of the type-4 light distributor 76 shown in FIG. 6 to be replaced by any other suitable component that performs the functions of these elements discussed above. As an example, a single VOA function and a single 1 to k optical switch function may be implemented with a single mirror device (MEMs) which can both switch light and attenuate light simultaneously. Alternatively, both the VOA function and the 1 to k optical switch function may be implemented using liquid crystal technology in another example embodiment.

In summary, the path through the type-4 light distributor 76 is as follows. A WDM or DWDM light stream is applied to the primary input 86 of the distributor 78. The type-2 light distributor 78 then demultiplexes the WDM/DWDM light stream into its individual wavelengths. Each of the individual wavelengths is attenuated by some programmable amount via a corresponding VOA 84. Each wavelength is then directed to its corresponding type-2 light combiner 80 and its corresponding k subtending output 81 via its corresponding type-3 light distributor 82 (1-to-k optical switch). At each type-2 light combiner 80, the combiner 80 multiplexes up to m wavelengths into a WDM/DWDM signal on a corresponding subtending output 81.

The light distributor 76 is a 1-to-k, type-4 light distributor configured to operate upon m wavelengths and using m VOA control signals, and m 1-to-k optical switch control signals. The type-4 light distributor 76 is also called a wavelength router or a wavelength selective switch (WSS).

FIG. 7 shows an example of a type-4 light combiner 88. The type-4 light combiner 88 processes optical signals similarly to the type-4 light distributor 76, except that the flow of light is from the subtending inputs 90 to the primary output 92.

As can be seen in FIG. 7, the type-4 light combiner 88 uses type-2 light distributors 94 and a type-2 light combiner 96, type-3 light combiners 98, and VOAs 100 positioned between the type-3 light combiners 98 and the type-2 light combiner 96. The type-2 light distributors 94, the type-2 light combiner 96, the type-3 light combiners 98, and the VOAs 100 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light distributor 52, the type-2 light combiner 58, the type-3 light combiner 70, and the VOAs 42, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5B, and 3A, although they are not limited thereto. In addition, a control signal associated with each VOA 100 can be used to set the attenuation value of each VOA 100. The subtending inputs 90 are individually denoted by the phrase “subtending input 1”, “subtending input 2”, . . . “subtending input k”, where k denotes the total number of subtending inputs. The type-4 light combiner 88 can be configured and programmed to direct each wavelength arriving in the light stream entering the subtending inputs 1 through k through a particular path to the primary output 92. This is accomplished by 1) receiving different multiple-wavelength signals, each composed of multiple wavelengths up to m wavelengths (λ₁, λ₂ . . . λ_(m)), with the type-2 light distributors 94 on the subtending inputs 90 (m representing the total number of wavelengths within the light stream entering the primary inputs 90), 2) separating each multiple-wavelength signal into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with a different one of the type-2 light distributors 94, 3) directing single-wavelength optical signals of the same wavelength from the type-2 light distributors 94 to the same type-3 light combiner 98, 4) using the type-3 light combiners 98 to select only one of the received single-wavelength optical signals of the same wavelength for outputting towards the primary output 92, 5) individually attenuating each selected single-wavelength optical signal output from the type-3 light combiners 98 with a corresponding VOA 100, and 6) combining the attenuated, selected single-wavelength optical signals with the type-2 light combiner 96 into a combined multiple-wavelength optical signal and outputting the combined multiple-wavelength optical signal on the primary output 92. As illustrated in FIG. 7, up to m number of wavelengths can be included within the light stream entering each subtending input 90, and up to m wavelengths can exit the primary output 92. As noted above, the k-to-1 optical switches 98 can be configured so that only one wavelength from each subtending input 90 can be directed to the primary output 92. Therefore, for example, if wavelength λ₂ from subtending input 1 is directed to the primary output 92, then wavelength λ₂ from subtending input 2 (or any other input) cannot simultaneously be directed to the primary output 92. The k-to-1 optical switches 98 are programmable to select any of the single-wavelength optical signals of the same wavelength received by each type-3 light combiner 98 for outputting towards the primary output 92. It can also be noted that once a given wavelength is directed to the primary output 92, the optical power of that wavelength can be attenuated by some programmable amount via the VOA 100 associated with that output wavelength, although it is not required to do so. It can also be noted that the VOA 100 associated with a given wavelength can be programmed such that the wavelength is blocked from exiting the primary output 92 completely. Further, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 light combiner 88 to not include the VOAs 100. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the light combiner 88 to include more or fewer than the number of type-2 light distributors 94, VOAs 100, type-3 light combiners 98, and type-2 light combiners 96 shown in FIG. 7. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 light combiner 88 to include additional elements. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-2 light distributors 94, VOAs 100, type-3 light combiners 98, and type-2 light combiner 96 of the type-4 light combiner 88 shown in FIG. 7 to be replaced by any other suitable component that performs the functions thereof discussed above. As an example, a single VOA function and a single k to 1 optical switch function may be implemented with a single mirror device (MEMs) which can both switch light and attenuate light simultaneously. Alternatively, both the VOA function and the k to 1 optical switch function may be implemented using liquid crystal technology, in another example embodiment.

In summary, the path through the type-4 light combiner is as follows. A WDM or DWDM light stream is applied to each of the subtending inputs 90 of the combiner 88. The light stream of each input can include up to m wavelengths simultaneously. The type-2 light distributor 94 at each subtending input 90 then demultiplexes the WDM/DWDM light streams into their individual wavelengths. The k-to-1 optical switch 98 associated with each wavelength is then used to select a wavelength from one of the k subtending inputs thereof. Each of the selected individual wavelengths is attenuated by some programmable amount via its corresponding VOA 100. The type-2 light combiner 96 then multiplexes up to m wavelengths into a WDM/DWDM signal and outputs the result on the primary output 92.

As can be seen from FIG. 7, the type-4 light combiner 88 is a k-to-1, type-4 light combiner operating upon m wavelengths that requires m VOA control signals, and m k-to-1 optical switch control signals. This type-4 light combiner is also called a wavelength router or a wavelength selective switch (WSS).

Types of ROADMs

FIG. 8 shows an example of an embodiment of a type-1 ROADM core device 102. It includes a type-1 light combiner 102 a or a type-1A light combiner 102 b and a type-4 light distributor 102 c. The type-1 light combiner 102 a, the type-1A light combiner 102 b, and the type-4 light distributor 102 c can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light combiner 30, the type-1A light combiner 44, and the type-4 light distributor 76, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 2B, 3B, and 6, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1 ROADM core device 102 to include more than the number of components (i.e., one type-1 light combiner 102 a, one type-1A light combiner 102 b, and one type-4 light distributor 102 c) shown in FIG. 8. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-1 light combiner 102 a or the type-1A light combiner 102 b, and the type-4 light distributor 102 c shown in FIG. 8 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof, as discussed above.

FIG. 9 shows an example embodiment of how two type-1 ROADM core devices can be configured to build the multiplexing and demultiplexing functions associated with a 2-degree ROADM based optical node including two DWDM line interfaces.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram of an example of a DWDM network element 104 including an optical node that is used to add and drop wavelengths to and from a DWDM network ring or other type of network. The network element 104 includes two type-1 ROADM core devices, including an east ROADM core device 108 and a west ROADM core device 110, each including a bidirectional DWDM line interface 108 a, 110 a, respectively. The bidirectional DWDM line interface is also called an input line interface, a network node interface, or a network interface. The type-1 ROADM core devices 108, 110 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 102 shown in FIG. 8, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network element 104 to include more than the number of type-1 ROADM core devices shown in FIG. 9. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-1 ROADM core devices 108, 110 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof discussed below. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, to connect to each primary input 108 b, 110 b of each ROADM core device 108, 110 an input optical amplifier (not shown). The input optical amplifier can be used to compensate for any loss associated with the length of fiber connected to the primary input 108 b, 110 b of the ROADM core device 108, 110. Similarly, it is within the scope of this example embodiment to connect to the primary output 108 c, 110 c of the each ROADM core device 108, 110 an output optical amplifier (not shown). The output optical amplifier could be used to compensate for any insertion loss of the two ROADMs 108, 110 located between a primary input (for example, the primary input 110 b on the west ROADM core device 110) and a primary output (for example, the primary output 108 c on the east ROADM core device 108 for instance). The input optical amplifier (not shown) could have the ability to adjust its optical gain, based upon the length of fiber connected to it. The output optical amplifier, however, may be of the fixed-gain type, since insertion loss of the two ROADMs 108 and 110 is normally a fixed non-changing value. Alternatively, however, the output optical amplifier can be of the varying gain type, in order to accommodate different types of ROADMs of differing insertion losses. It is within the scope of any of the other example embodiments disclosed herein to include such optical amplifiers. It is also within this example embodiment, for network element 104 to include more than the number of type-1 ROADM core devices shown in FIG. 9. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-1 ROADM core devices 108, 110 shown in FIG. 9 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

The processing of a signal entering the network element 104 will now be described. A DWDM signal can enter a DWDM line interface 108 a, 110 a of the network element 104 at the primary input 110 b on the west side of the network element, for example, at the west ROADM 110, as shown in FIG. 9. At the DWDM line interface 110 a, the optical supervisory channel of the DWDM signal is filtered out from the other optical wavelengths and forwarded to an associated optical supervisory channel processor (not shown) for further processing. It is within the scope of any of the other example embodiments discussed herein to include such filtering and supervisory channel processing. In the example embodiment in which the network element includes an optical input amplifier (not shown), the remaining optical wavelengths can be forwarded to the associated optical input amplifier (not shown), which simultaneously amplifies all the wavelengths as they pass through it. Following amplification, the amplified wavelengths can be sent to the type-4 light distributor unit 112 within the west ROADM 110 (or, in example embodiments in which there is no amplification, after the optical supervisory channel is filtered out, the DWDM signal is forwarded directly to the type-4 light distributor unit 112 within the west ROADM 110). The light distributor unit 112 can be used to isolate individual wavelengths in order to allow them to be “dropped” to individual optical converters (not shown) at drop outputs 110 d, also called drop output ports, of the west ROADM 110 (the east ROADM 108 has corresponding drop outputs 108 d, to which individual wavelengths can be dropped when a signal is input on the primary input 108 b). A wavelength dropped to an optical converter is converted by the converter to either a non-colored optical signal (e.g., a 1310 or 850 nm signal) or an electrical signal. The converted signal is then passed out a client interface of the converter. In FIG. 9, the optical converters would be connected to the drop outputs 110 d of the ROADM core device 110. Any optical wavelengths from the input amplifier (not shown) that are not dropped to an optical converter (in west ROADM 110, for example) can be passed though to the light combiner unit 114 (to the east ROADM 108, for example). In FIG. 9, these wavelengths that are “passed through” in the west to east direction follow the path from the light distributor 112 of the west ROADM 110 to the light combiner 114 in the east ROADM 108. The light combiner unit 114 in the east ROADM can be used to multiplex signals from the west ROADM 110 with the input signals from the optical line converters (not shown) connected to the east ROADM 108 at add inputs thereof 108 e (the west ROADM 110 includes corresponding add inputs or ports 110 e which can add wavelengths to light combiner 118 that can be combined with a signal from light distributor 116 in the east ROADM 108 when a signal is input on primary input 108 b of the east ROADM 108). In one example embodiment, once these signals are combined into a single DWDM signal by the light combiner unit 114, a single DWDM signal is output from the primary output 108 c to the network node interface 108 a of the east ROADM 108. In another example embodiment, after leaving the light combiner unit 114 and before being output on the primary output, the single DWDM signal is forwarded to an associated output optical amplifier (not shown) in order to be amplified by some predetermined amount, and prior to exiting the network element 104, an OSC filter (not shown) is used to combine an output optical supervisory channel signal with the wavelengths of the DWDM signal from the output amplifier. It is within the scope of the other embodiments disclosed herein to include such an output amplifier and OSC filter.

Optical converters (not shown) connected to the add inputs 108 e, 110 e of the ROADM core devices 108, 110 convert client signals (either electrical or optical) to “colored” optical signals of some predetermined frequency and wavelength. For instance, a client signal could be converted to the wavelength associated with wavelength 1 of the m wavelengths supported by the ROADMs 108, 110, or alternatively a client signal could be converted to any of the wavelengths associated with any of the m wavelengths supported by the ROADMs 108, 110.

DWDM signals arriving at the primary input 108 b of the east ROADM 108 can be forwarded to the light distributor unit 116 of the east ROADM 108, which separates the DWDM signals into single-wavelength signals and transmits certain single-wavelength signals to the drop outputs 108 d of the east ROADM 108 and transmits other single-wavelength signals to the light combiner unit 118 in the west ROADM 110, in the same manner that is described for those signals arriving at the primary input 110 b of the west ROADM 110.

The FIG. 9 network element 104 can be considered to be a “two degree” network element or node, since it is capable of connecting to two DWDM line interfaces, which can connect to two other optical nodes. Since the light distributors 112 and 116 can direct any received wavelength to any subtending output thereof, and since the add inputs 108 e, 110 e, which are connected to the subtending inputs of the light combiners 114, 118, can receive any wavelength directed thereto, the ROADMs 108 and 110 in FIG. 9 are said to have “colorless” add/drop ports. A colorless add/drop port is not assigned a particular frequency or wavelength so that any frequency or wavelength can be used with the port (e.g., any wavelength can be added to any of the colorless add ports and any wavelength can be dropped from any of the colorless drop ports). Thus, drop outputs 108 d, 110 d, and add inputs 108 e and 110 e are colorless ports. In the FIG. 9 network element 104, each of the outputs of the optical converters (not shown) connected to the add inputs 108 e, 110 e, could have VOAs (not shown). These VOAs could be used to adjust the power levels of each added wavelength to match the power levels of the “pass-through” wavelengths, before all the combined wavelengths exit the ROADMs via the primary outputs 108 c, 110 c. The optical power of the pass-through wavelengths can be adjusted via the VOAs within the type-4 light distributors 112, 116, although it is not required to do so.

FIG. 10 shows an example embodiment of a ROADM based network element 120 including two type-1 ROADM core devices 122 and 124 having two DWDM line interfaces 122 a, 124 a, respectively, and using type-1A light combiners 122 b, 124 b. The type-1A light combiners 122 b, 124 b can be the same as, for example, the type-1A light combiner 44 shown in FIG. 3B, although they are not limited thereto. Except for the replacement of type-1 light combiners 114 and 118 with type-1A light combiners 122 b, 124 b, the ROADM core devices 122 and 124 can be the same as, for example, the ROADM core devices 108, 110 shown in FIG. 9, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for network element 120 to include more than the number of type-1 ROADM core devices shown in FIG. 10. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-1 ROADM core devices 122, 124 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions of thereof. The type-1A light combiners 122 b, 124 b allow wavelengths applied to the add inputs 122 c, 124 c of the ROADM core devices 122, 124 to have their optical power levels adjusted by the VOAs 122 d, 124 d included within the type-1A light combiners 122 b, 124 b, thus eliminating the need to have VOAs on the outputs of the optical converters (not shown) connected to the add inputs 122 c, 124 c of the ROADM core devices 122, 124. With the type-1 ROADM core devices 122, 124, the type-4 light distributors 122 e, 124 e provide the ability to “block” wavelengths from propagating from the primary inputs 122 f, 124 f of the ROADMs 122, 124 to subtending outputs 122 g, 124 g connected to the paired ROADM core device, since the type-4 light distributors 122 e, 124 e contain VOAs (not shown) whose attenuation coefficient can be set to 0 for those wavelengths. Therefore, when a given wavelength entering a type-1 ROADM core device 122, 124 (in a node having paired type-1 ROADM core devices) is diverted to a drop port 122 h, 124 h thereof, that wavelength can be prevented from being passed to its companion ROADM core device, and therefore an optical signal of the same wavelength can be added to the primary output 122 i, 124 i of the companion ROADM core device without any interference from an optical signal of the same wavelength arriving at the light combiner 122 b, 124 b of the companion ROADM core device.

FIG. 11 illustrates an example embodiment of a two-degree ROADM based network element 126 including two connected type-2 ROADM core devices 128 and 130. It is within the scope of this example embodiment for network element 126 to include more than the number of type-2 ROADM core devices shown in FIG. 11. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-2 ROADM core devices 128, 130 shown in FIG. 11 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof discussed below. These type-2 ROADM core devices 128, 130 each can include a type-4 light distributor (128 a, 130 a) and a type-4 light combiner (128 b, 130 b). The type-4 light distributors 128 a, 130 a and the type-4 light combiners 128 b, 130 b can be the same as, for example, the type-4 light distributor 76 and the type-4 light combiner 88, respectively, shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, although they are not limited thereto. Since any wavelength can be directed to any of the subtending outputs on a type-4-light distributor (for example, subtending outputs 128 c, 130 c), a type-2 ROADM core device in general, and the type-2 ROADM core devices 128, 130, in particular, are considered to have “colorless” drop ports, such as, colorless drop ports 128 d, 130 d in this example embodiment. Similarly, since any wavelength can be applied to any subtending input of a type-4 light combiner (for example, subtending inputs 128 e, 130 e in this example embodiment), the type-2 ROADM core device in general, and the type-2 ROADM core devices 128, 130, in particular, are considered to have “colorless” add ports, such as colorless add ports 128 f, 130 f in this example embodiment. The VOAs (not shown) within the type-4 light combiners 128 b, 130 b of each type-2 ROADM core device 128, 130 can be used to equalize the optical power of wavelengths exiting therefrom on the primary outputs 128 g, 130 g, respectively, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for no such equalizing to be performed. In addition, the VOAs (not shown) within the type-4 light distributors 128 a, 130 a of the type-2 ROADMs 128, 130 can be used to attenuate the power of wavelengths that are diverted to the drop outputs 128 d, 130 d, although it is within the scope of the invention, in an example embodiment, for no such attenuation to be performed. This attenuation function is useful in that it can protect the receiver circuitry on the optical converters (not shown) attached to the drop outputs 128 d, 130 d of the ROADM core devices 128, 130, assuming that the receiver circuitry of the optical converters do not include VOAs. If the receivers on the optical converters include VOAs, then there is no need for the type-4 light distributors 128 a, 130 a within the type-2 ROADM core devices 128, 130 to include VOAs.

FIG. 12 depicts an example of an embodiment of a type-3 ROADM core device 132. The type-3 ROADM core device 132 can include a type-1 light distributor 134, and a type-4 light combiner 136. (Alternatively, the type-3 ROADM core device 132 could include a type-1A light distributor.) The type-1 light distributor 134, the type-1A light distributor (not shown), and the type-4 light combiner 136 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light distributor 24, the type-1A light distributor 36, and the type-4 light combiner 88, respectively, shown in FIGS. 2A, 3A, and 7 although they are not limited thereto. Since the type-3 ROADM core device 132 includes a type-1 light distributor 134 and a type-4 light combiner 136, it can be configured to: 1) divide an optical signal received from another optical node from the network node interface 132 a on its primary input 132 b into a plurality of optical-power-divided output signals and output the optical-power-divided output signals on a plurality of subtending outputs 132 c with the type-1 light distributor 134; 2) receive first and second multiple-wavelength optical signals from first and second subtending inputs 132 d, respectively, with the type-4 light combiner 136; 3) separate the first and second multiple-wavelength optical signals into a first plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the first multiple-wavelength signal and a second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the second multiple-wavelength optical signal with the type-4 light combiner 136; 4) for single-wavelength optical signals in the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals having the same wavelength, select for outputting only one single-wavelength optical signal from one of the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light combiner 136; 5) attenuate each selected single-wavelength optical signal with the type-4 light combiner 136; and 6) combine the attenuated, selected single-wavelength optical signals into a single primary output optical signal to be output on the primary output 132 e of the ROADM core device 132 to the network node interface 132 a to another node, with the type-4 light combiner 136.

FIG. 13 shows a network element 138 including a type-3 ROADM core device 140 that is paired with a ROADM add-on. The ROADM add-on to which the type-3 ROADM core device 140 is paired is ROADM add-on 142, which has a type-2 light combiner 142 a and a type-2 light distributor 142 b. The primary input 142 c and the primary output 142 d of the ROADM add-on 142, are connected, respectively, to a subtending output 140 a of a type-1 light distributor 140 b, and a subtending input 140 c of a type-4 light distributor 140 d of the type-3 ROADM core device 140, rather than to a network node interface. The type-2 light combiner 142 a, the type-2 light distributor 142 b, the type-1 light distributor 140 b, and the type-4 light combiner 140 d can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light combiner 58, the type-2 light distributor 52, the type-1 light distributor 24, and the type-4 light combiner 88, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 4A, 4B, 2A, and 7, although they are not limited thereto. The ROADM add-on 142 is called a type-1 ROADM add-on, since it is added onto another ROADM to improve that other ROADM's functionality. It should be noted that a type-1 ROADM add-on is different from a type-1 ROADM core device in two ways. First, the type-1 ROADM core device has a type-4 light distributor and a type-1 light combiner, while a type-1 ROADM add-on has a type-2 light distributor and a type-2 light combiner. Second, the primary input and the primary output of a type-1 ROADM core device are connected to a network node interface to communicate with another node, while the primary input and the primary output of a type-1 ROADM add-on are connected to a subtending input and a subtending output of another ROADM core device within the node containing the type-1 ROADM add-on. Connecting the type-3 ROADM core device 140 to the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 creates a fully functional ROADM interface, also called a network element or a ROADM configuration, with “colored” add/drop ports. A colored port is pre-assigned only one particular frequency or wavelength. No other wavelengths or frequencies can be used with such a “colored” port. As a result, only the pre-assigned wavelength for a particular add port can be added at that add port, and only the pre-assigned wavelength for a particular drop port can be dropped from that drop port. As shown in FIG. 13, the colored add ports 142 e and the colored drop ports 142 f are on the type-1 ROADM add-on 142. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network element 138 to include additional optical elements and it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-3 ROADM core device 140 and the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 to include additional components to those shown in FIG. 13. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-3 ROADM core device 140 and the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 shown in FIG. 13 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

All m wavelengths entering the primary input 140 e of the type-3 ROADM core device 140 can be sent through the type-1 light distributor 140 b to the type-2 light distributor 142 b of the type-1 ROADM add-on 142, as well as to all other subtending outputs 140 f of the type-1 light distributor 140 b within the type-3 ROADM core device 140. Therefore, all m wavelengths can be directed to the m drop ports 142 f (also called colored drops 142 f) of the network element 138 (which are on the type-1 ROADM add-on 142), while at the same time being directed to all other subtending outputs 140 f of the type-1 light distributor 140 b, which are also the subtending outputs of the type-3 ROADM core device 140. (This configuration enables an optical “drop and continue” operation, as will be illustrated in FIG. 14.) The ROADM configuration 138 shown in FIG. 13 assumes the use of VOAs (not shown) on the receivers of the optical converters (not shown) attached to the drop outputs 142 f thereof. Alternatively these VOAs could be provided to the outputs of the type-2 light distributor 142 b of the type-1 ROADM add-on 142, or no VOAs need to be used at all. Since the type-2 light distributor 142 b directs a given wavelength to a particular drop output 142 f thereof, the ROADM configuration 138 of FIG. 13 is said to include “colored” drop ports. Accordingly, only a single pre-assigned wavelength is output from each drop port 142 f and each drop port 142 f outputs only a single pre-assigned wavelength that does not change over the course of the use of the type-2 light distributor 142 b.

Similarly, since a particular wavelength must be directed to a particular subtending input 142 g of the type-2 light combiner 142 a within the type-1 ROADM add-on 142, the ROADM configuration 138 shown in FIG. 13 is said to include “colored” add ports 142 e, which are connected to the subtending inputs 142 g of the type-2 light combiner 142 a. However, as can be seen from FIG. 13, all m wavelengths can be inserted into the add ports 142 e of the type-1 ROADM add-on 142.

Up to m wavelengths input into the colored add ports 142 e of the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 can be multiplexed into a single DWDM light stream by the type-2 light combiner 142 a of the type-1 ROADM add-on 142. This light stream is then forwarded via the primary output 142 d of the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 to one of the subtending inputs 140 c of the type-4 light combiner 140 d of the type-3 ROADM core device 140. The type-4 light combiner 140 d can then be used to power equalize any added wavelengths which can be forwarded to the primary output of the type-3 ROADM core device 140, although in other example embodiments no power equalization is required.

FIG. 14 shows a two-degree network element 144 including two ROADM configurations 146, 148, each including a type-3 ROADM core device connected to the primary input and the primary output of a type-1 ROADM add-on. The ROADM configurations 146 and 148 can be the same as, for example, the ROADM configuration shown 138 shown in FIG. 13, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network element 144 to include additional ROADM configurations and it is within the scope of the invention, in an example embodiment, for the type-3 ROADM core devices and the type-1 ROADM add-ons within the ROADM configurations 146, 148 to include additional ROADMs and other components to those shown in FIG. 14. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-3 ROADM core devices and the type-1 ROADM add-ons shown in FIG. 14 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof. The ROADM configuration 146 includes a type-3 west ROADM core device 150 and a type-1 ROADM add-on 152, while ROADM configuration 148 includes a type-3 east ROADM core device 154 and a type-1 ROADM add-on 156. The primary input 152 a of the type-1 ROADM add-on 152 is connected to a subtending output 150 a of the type-3 west ROADM core device 150, while the primary output 152 b of the type-1 ROADM add-on 152 is connected to a subtending input 150 b of the type-3 west ROADM core device 150. Similarly, the primary input 156 a of the type-1 ROADM add-on 156 is connected to a subtending output 154 a of the type-3 west ROADM core device 154, while the primary output 156 b of the type-1 ROADM add-on 156 is connected to a subtending input 154 b of the type-3 west ROADM core device 154. In this example embodiment, the type-1 light distributor 150 c of the type-3 west ROADM core device 150 enables a wavelength arriving on the DWDM line interface 150 d to be both dropped to a colored drop port 152 c on the type-1 ROADM add-on 152 (by being transmitted from the subtending output 150 a to the primary input 152 a of the ROADM add-on 152, where the wavelength is directed to a pre-assigned drop port 152 c by the type-2 light distributor 152 d), and passed through to the companion type-3 east ROADM core device 154 (by subtending output 150 e), thus performing an optical drop and continue function on that wavelength. (A drop and continue function is useful for applications such as video broadcast and dual-ring interconnection protection architectures.) Similarly, the type-1 light distributor 154 c of the type-3 east ROADM core device 154 enables a wavelength arriving on the DWDM line interface 154 d to be both dropped to a colored drop port 156 c on the type-1 ROADM add-on 156 (by being transmitted from the subtending output 154 a to the primary input 156 a of the ROADM add-on 156, where the wavelength is directed to a pre-assigned drop port 156 c by the type-2 light distributor 156 d), and passed through to the companion type-3 west ROADM core device 150 (by subtending output 154 e), thus performing an optical drop and continue function on that wavelength. In the network element 144, all wavelengths entering the type-1 light distributors 150 c, 154 c of each type-3 ROADM core device 150, 154 from the network node interfaces 150 d, 154 d, respectively, can be simultaneously dropped to each drop port 152 c, 156 c of the associated type-1 ROADM add-on 152, 156 and sent to the companion ROADM's type-4 light combiner 150 f, 154 f. The type-4 light combiner 150 f, 154 f within each ROADM core device 150, 154 can combine any wavelengths that “pass-through” from the companion ROADM with any wavelengths added via the type-2 light combiner 152 e, 156 e of the ROADM's associated type-1 ROADM add-on 152, 156 in order to form a DWDM signal exiting one of the DWMD line interfaces 150 d, 154 d. The type-4 light combiners 150 f, 154 f can power equalize both the added wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths, although they need not do so. The type-2 light distributors 152 d, 156 d, the type-2 light combiners 152 e, 156 e, the type-1 light distributors 150 c,154 c, and the type-4 light combiners 150 f, 154 f can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light distributor 52, the type-2 light combiner 58, the type-1 light distributor 24, and the type-4 light combiner 88, respectively, shown in FIGS. 4A, 4B, 2A, and 7, although they are not limited thereto.

In the FIG. 14 configuration 144, each type-3 ROADM core device 150,154 includes additional subtending inputs and outputs that are unused. These unused inputs and outputs can be used to support (and couple with) additional ROADM core devices (called ROADM degrees), or to support coupling with other ROADM add-ons whose primary inputs and outputs are connected thereto. For instance, a type-3 ROADM core device with k subtending inputs and k subtending outputs can be used to create a k-degree ROADM core device (capable of communicating with k other optical nodes through k network node interfaces) while simultaneously supporting the adding and dropping of m wavelengths. (Such a ROADM core device using a type-4 ROADM core device, which includes a built-in type-2 light distributor and type-2 light combiner will be described below.)

FIG. 15 shows an example embodiment of a network element or configuration 158 with colorless add/drop ports, including a type-3 ROADM core device 160 that is connected to the primary input 162 a and the primary output 162 b of a type-1 ROADM core device 162. The type-3 ROADM core device 160 and the type-1 ROADM core device 162 can be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 132 shown in FIG. 12, and the type-1 ROADM core device 102 shown in FIG. 8, respectively, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network configuration 158 to include additional ROADMs and additional optical elements. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-3 ROADM core device 160 and the type-1 ROADM core device 162 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof. In this example embodiment, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 can function as a ROADM add-on to the type-3 ROADM core device 160. The type-1 light distributor 160 a of the type-3 ROADM core device 160 can route a copy of each wavelength arriving on its primary input 160 b to the type-4 light distributor 162 c of the type-1 ROADM core device 162. The type-4 light distributor 162 in the type-1 ROADM core device 162 can be used to direct up to k wavelengths to individual colorless drop ports 162 d of the type-1 ROADM core device 162, where k is the total number of wavelengths and the number of drop ports 162 d is at least as great as the number of wavelengths. As a result, each of the wavelengths arriving at the primary input 160 b can be directed to any of the drop ports 162 d, since the type-4 light distributor can direct any wavelength to any subtending output thereof.

Similarly, the type-1 light combiner 162 e in the type-1 ROADM core device 162 enables for up to k wavelengths to be added to the ROADM configuration 158 shown in FIG. 15, where k is the total number of wavelengths added at the add ports 162 f of the type-1 ROADM core device 162 and the number of add ports 162 f is at least as great as the number of wavelengths. The type-1 light combiner 162 e combines the wavelengths added at the add ports 162 f to produce a multiple-wavelength optical signal that is output on the primary output 162 b to the type-4 light combiner 160 c of the type-3 ROADM core device 160. The type-4 light combiner 160 c combines that multiple-wavelength optical signal with other optical signals inputted thereinto at different subtending inputs 160 g, and the combined signal is output on the primary output 160 d to the network node interface 160 e of the type-3 ROADM core device 160 for transmission to another node.

Since the type-1 light distributor 160 a of the type-3 ROADM core device 160 includes multiple subtending outputs 160 f, and since the type-4 light combiner 160 c of the type-3 ROADM core device 160 includes multiple subtending inputs 160 g, multiple type-1 ROADM core devices can be attached to the type-3 ROADM core device 160 via these subtending inputs and outputs. For instance, if each type-1 ROADM core device 162 includes 8 drop ports and 8 add ports (k=8, where, in this instance, k is the number of add ports and the number of drop ports), and the type-3 ROADM core device 160 supports 32 wavelengths (m=32) and has at least 5 subtending inputs and outputs, four type-1 ROADM core devices could be coupled to the type-3 ROADM core device 160, leaving one subtending input and output to connect to a similar ROADM configuration similar to configuration 158, thereby forming a two-degree ROADM node (having two network node interfaces) that supports 32 colorless add/drop ports.

FIG. 16 shows an example of an embodiment of a type-4 ROADM core or core device 164, also referred to as a universal ROADM core device. As shown, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 includes the functionality of the combination of a type-3 ROADM core device and a type-1 ROADM add-on by fully integrating a type-1 ROADM add-on into a type-3 ROADM core device. Therefore, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 of FIG. 16 can be used in all the applications in which the ROADM configuration 138 of FIG. 13 can be used and vice versa. For example, for the applications shown in FIGS. 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 46, 49, 50, 53-58, and 59A-59H, any type-4 ROADM core device or ROADM core device shown in these figures can be replaced with a type-3 ROADM core device externally connected to a type-1 ROADM add-on, one example of which is shown in FIG. 13 (and vice versa). The type-3 ROADM core device and the type-1 ROADM add-on that include the type-4 ROADM core device 164 can be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device and the type-1 ROADM add-on shown in FIG. 13, although they are not limited thereto. Accordingly, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 can include a type-1 light distributor 164 a, a type-2 light distributor 164 b, a type-2 light combiner 164 c, and a type-4 light combiner 164 d. The type-1 light distributor 164 a, the type-2 light distributor 164 b, the type-2 light combiner 164 c, and the type-4 light combiner 164 d can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light distributor 24, the type-2 light distributor 52, the type-2 light combiner 58, and the type-4 light combiner 88, respectively, shown in FIGS. 2A, 3A, 3B, and 7, although they are not limited thereto. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 ROADM core device 164 to include components in addition to the components shown in FIG. 16. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-1 light distributor 164 a, the type-2 light distributor 164 b, the type-2 light combiner 164 c, and the type-4 light combiner 164 d to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

Because the type-4 ROADM core device 164 can include type-1 and type-2 distributors 164 a, 164 b and type-2 and type-4 light combiners 164 c, 164 d, the ROADM core device 164 can be configured to: 1) divide the optical power of an another-node-originating optical signal received from another optical node via the network node interface 164 e on the primary input 164 f of the device 164 between a plurality of optical-power-divided, output optical signals of multiple wavelengths, output from the ROADM core device on a plurality of subtending outputs 164 g with the type-1 light distributor 164 a; 2) separate one of the plurality of optical-power-divided output optical signals into a plurality of dropped optical signals each of a single-wavelength output from a plurality of colored drop ports 164 h thereof with the type-2 light distributor 164 b; 3) receive on a subtending input 164 i of the type-4 light combiner 164 d a first multiple-wavelength optical signal generated by the type-2 light combiner 164 c combining optical signals of different wavelengths added to the ROADM core device 164 via colored add ports 164 j thereof, and receive with the type-4 light combiner 164 d a second multiple-wavelength optical signal from a subtending input 164 k of the ROADM core device 164 (the first and second multiple-wavelength optical signals may contain one or more wavelengths in common); 4) separate the first and second multiple-wavelength optical signals into a first plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the first multiple-wavelength signal and a second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the second multiple-wavelength optical signal with the type-4 light combiner 164 d; 5) for single-wavelength optical signals in the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals having the same wavelength, select only one single-wavelength optical signal from one of the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals for outputting with the type-4 light combiner 164 d; 6) attenuate each selected single-wavelength optical signal with the type-4 light combiner 164 d; and 7) combine the attenuated, selected single-wavelength optical signals into a single primary output optical signal to be output on a primary output 164 l of the ROADM core device 164 via the network node interface 164 e to another node with the type-4 light combiner 164 d.

The type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16 can add/drop all m wavelengths of inputted and outputted optical signals, while simultaneously supporting additional ROADM add-on devices and functions, without limitation, as shown in the other figures. For instance, FIG. 17 shows a network element 166 in which k colorless add ports/drop ports are added to a type-4 ROADM core device 168 by connecting a type-1 ROADM core device 170 thereto, which includes k colorless add ports 170 a and k colorless drop ports 170 b. The type-4 ROADM core device 168 and the type-1 ROADM core device 170 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, and the type-1 ROADM core device 102 shown in FIG. 8, respectively, but they are not limited thereto. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network element 166 to include ROADMs and other optical elements in addition to those shown in FIG. 17. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 ROADM core device 168 and the type-1 ROADM core device 170 to include components in addition to the components shown in FIG. 17. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core device 168 and the type-1 ROADM core device 170 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof. The type-1 ROADM core device 170 functions as a colorless optical add/drop device. More specifically, since the type-1 ROADM core device 170 includes a type-4 light distributor 170 c and a type-1 light combiner 170 d, the type-1 ROADM core device 170 can be configured to: 1) separate one of the optical-power-divided output optical signals output from the type-1 light distributor 168 a of the type-4 ROADM core device 168 on one of the plurality of subtending outputs 168 b thereof into a plurality of add/drop device, single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light distributor 170 c; 2) change the intensity of the add/drop device, single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light distributor 170 c; and 3) assign and output each of the add/drop device, single-wavelength optical signals to only one of and any one of the plurality of drop ports 170 b with the type-4 light distributor 170 c. As a result, the type-4 light distributor 170 c of the type-1 ROADM core device 170 can be configured to assign each of the add/drop device, single-wavelength optical signals to any of the plurality of drop ports 170 b, thereby making the drop ports 170 b colorless drop ports. Further, the type-1 light combiner 170 d of the type-1 ROADM core device 170 can be configured to combine into a multiple-wavelength optical signal a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals each inputted into one of the plurality of different colorless add ports 170 a, and output the multiple-wavelength optical signal to a subtending input 168 c of the type-4 light combiner 168 d of the type-4 ROADM core 168.

Similarly, FIG. 18 shows a network element 172 in which k colorless add/drop ports are added to a type-4 ROADM core device 174 by connecting thereto a type-1 ROADM core device 176 that includes both an input optical amplifier 178 and an output optical amplifier 180. These optical amplifiers can be useful for the case where there is a very large insertion loss associated with the paths through the type-4 ROADM core device 174, although they are not required. Typically this would be the case when j is very large, j being the number of subtending outputs 174 a of the type-1 light distributor 174 b of the type-4 ROADM core device 174 and the number of subtending inputs 174 c of the type-4 light combiner 174 d of the type-4 ROADM core device 174. Therefore, the number of optical amplifiers used depends upon the implementation. For example, depending upon the implementation, only one of the optical amplifiers shown in FIG. 18 may be required. The type-4 ROADM core device 174 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16 and/or the type-4 ROADM core device 168 shown in FIG. 17, but it is not limited thereto. In addition, the type-1 ROADM core device 176 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 102 shown in FIG. 8 and/or the type-1 ROADM core device 170 shown in FIG. 16 (with the exception of the use of amplifiers 178 and 180), but it is not limited thereto. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network element 172 to include ROADMs and other optical elements in addition to those shown in FIG. 18. In addition, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 ROADM core device 174 and the type-1 ROADM core device 176 to include components in addition to the components shown in FIG. 18. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core device 174 and the type-1 ROADM core device 176 to be replaced by any other suitable components (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

FIG. 19 illustrates another example embodiment in which a network element 180 includes four type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 that are each connected to all the other type-4 ROADM core devices. The type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, and/or 174 shown in FIGS. 16-18, respectively, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network element 180 to include ROADMs and other optical elements in addition to those shown in FIG. 19. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 to include components thereof in addition to the components shown in FIG. 19. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or performs) the functions of these elements. The type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 can be interconnected to form a four-degree node having four network node interfaces 182 a, 184 a, 186 a, and 188 a, one associated with each type-4 ROADM core device, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 to include more than one network node interface and/or for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 to lack a network node interface. In this example embodiment, each of the four type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 have four subtending inputs and outputs (i.e., k=4). More specifically, the ROADM core device 182 has subtending outputs 182 b, 182 c, 182 d, and 182 e and subtending inputs 182 f, 182 g, 182 h, and 182 i. Similarly, the ROADM core device 184 has subtending outputs 184 b, 184 c, 184 d, and 184 e and subtending inputs 184 f, 184 g, 184 h, and 184 i. The ROADM core device 186 has subtending outputs 186 b, 186 c, 186 d, and 186 e and subtending inputs 186 f, 186 g, 186 h, and 186 i. And the ROADM core device 188 has subtending outputs 188 b, 188 c, 188 d, and 188 e and subtending inputs 188 f, 188 g, 188 h, and 188 i. In each type-4 ROADM core device, one of the k subtending inputs (182 f, 184 f, 186 f, and 188 f) of the type-4 light combiner (182 j, 184 j, 186 j, and 188 j) can be used to couple the integrated type-2 light combiner (182 k, 184 k, 186 k, and 188 k), and one of the k subtending outputs (182 e, 184 e, 186 e, and 188 e) of the type-1 light distributor (182 l, 184 l, 186 l, and 188 l) can be used to couple to the integrated type-2 light distributor (182 m, 184 m, 186 m, and 188 m). Each of the other three subtending inputs and outputs of a given type-4 ROADM core device is used to couple the given type-4 ROADM core device to the other three type-4 ROADM core devices. All m wavelengths arriving at each of the DWDM line interfaces 182 a, 184 a, 186 a, and 188 a can be made available to all of the other three DWDM line interfaces. Therefore, the type-4 light combiner (182 j, 184 j, 186 j, and 188 j) of a given type-4 ROADM core device receives all m wavelengths arriving at each DWDM line interface (182 a, 184 a, 186 a, and 188 a) and receives all m wavelengths received by add ports (designated by the term “Adds” in FIG. 19; the drop ports of the type-4 ROADM core devices 182, 184, 186, and 188 are designated by the term “Drops” in FIG. 19) of the given type-4 ROADM core device. In addition, the type-4 light combiner (182 j, 184 j, 186 j, or 188 j) of the given type-4 ROADM core device can select for outputting to the DWDM line interface of the given type-4 ROADM core device any of the m wavelengths received at any of the three DWDM line interfaces of the other three type-4 ROADM core devices and any of the m wavelengths applied to the add ports of the given type-4 ROADM core device. Therefore, the type-4 light combiner (182 j, 184 j, 186 j, or 188 j) of a given ROADM core device (182, 184, 186, or 188) has access to up to m×4 wavelengths. This is because the type-1 light distributor (182 l, 184 l, 186 l, and 188 l), within each type-4 ROADM core device directs copies of all m wavelengths it receives on its DWDM line interface to each of the other three type-4 ROADM core devices.

Although FIG. 19 illustrates an example embodiment of a 4-degree ROADM node, also called a 4-degree optical node, using four type-4 ROADM core devices, each having one network node interface, with k=4 (i.e., where k denotes the number of subtending inputs and outputs and therefore in FIG. 19 there are 4 pairs of subtending inputs and subtending outputs on each ROADM core device 182, 184, 186, and 188), it can be noted that in general an r-degree ROADM node can be created using r number of type-4 ROADM core devices with k=r (i.e., the number of pairs of subtending inputs and outputs equal the number of network node interfaces through which the node can be connected to other nodes). Thus, for example, an 8-degree ROADM node can be created using eight type-4 ROADM core devices with 8 subtending inputs and outputs (i.e., k=8). It could be understood to one ordinarily skilled in the art that in such a node, each of the eight type-4 ROADM core devices could be connected to all the other type-4 ROADM core devices to form an 8-degree ROADM node using the techniques shown in FIG. 19 for the 4-degree node.

FIG. 20 illustrates an example embodiment of an application for a 4-degree DWDM node. In this example embodiment, a network 190 includes nodes 1-5 including a first two-degree node 192, a second two-degree node 194, a third four-degree node 196, a fourth two-degree node 198, and a fifth two-degree node 200. The 4-degree node 196 interconnects two DWDM rings (Ring 1 and Ring 2). Each ring includes two 2-degree nodes and two network node interfaces on the 4-degree node. Wavelengths can be directed from one ring to another using the wavelength interconnect capabilities of the 4-degree node 196. For instance, a wavelength originating at an add port of the fifth node 200 may be forwarded to a drop port on the first node 192, via the third node 196, all in the optical domain. Nodes 1, 2, 4, and 5 each include two type-4 ROADM core devices, while node 3 includes four type-4 ROADM core devices. The type-4 ROADM core devices in these nodes can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19 (with the same or a different number of subtending inputs and outputs), although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the network element 190 to include ROADMs and other optical elements in addition to those shown in FIG. 20. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-4 ROADM core devices within each node to include components in addition to the components of the type-4 ROADM core devices shown in FIGS. 16-19. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices in any of the nodes to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

Spur Add-Ons, Spur Main Nodes, and Spur End Nodes

FIG. 21 introduces an example embodiment of another type of ROADM add-on, the spur add-on. Spur add-ons typically provide a low cost means of adding an optical spur to an optical ring and an optical network. (The spur concept will be explained further in subsequent paragraphs.) FIG. 21 shows a type-1A spur add-on 210 that includes a type-2 light combiner 212 paired with a two-input, type-1 light combiner 214, and a type-2 light distributor 216 paired with a two-output, type-1 light distributor 218. The type-2 light combiner 212, the two-input, type-1 light combiner 214, the type-2 light distributor 216, and the two-output, type-1 light distributor 218 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light combiner 58, the type-1 light combiner 30, the type-2 light distributor 52, and the type-1 light distributor 24, respectively, shown in FIGS. 4B, 2B, 4A, and 2A, although they are not limited thereto. It is also within the scope of this for the spur add-on 210 to include components in addition to those shown in FIG. 21. It is further within the scope of this for any of the type-2 light combiner 212, the two-input, type-1 light combiner 214, the type-2 light distributor 216, and the two-output, type-1 light distributor 218 shown in FIG. 21 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof discussed above.

FIG. 22 shows an example of an embodiment of a type-1B spur add-on 220 that includes one type-2 light combiner 222 paired with a two-input, type-1A light combiner 224, and a type-2 light distributor 226 paired with a two-output, type-1 light distributor 228. In addition, a VOA 230 is positioned at the output of the type-2 light combiner 222 so as to provide variable optical attenuation of optical signals output from the type-2 light combiner 222 to the subtending input 224 a of the light combiner 224, although it is not required to do so. VOA 230 can be used to simultaneously attenuate all m wavelengths exiting the type-2 light combiner 222 by the same amount, although it is not required to do so. The other subtending input 224 b of the light combiner 224 also contains VOA 232 to provide variable optical attenuation of optical signals entering the spur add-on 220 on the primary input 220 a, although it is not required to do so. VOA 232 can be used to simultaneously attenuate all m wavelengths input on the primary input 220 a and entering the combiner 224 by the same amount, although it is not required to do so. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, to provide an optional VOA 234 at the subtending input 228 a of the light distributor 228. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1B spur add-on 220 to be identical, for example, to the type-1A spur add-on 210 shown in FIG. 21 except for the use of VOAs as noted above. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-1B spur add-on 220 to be different from the type-1A spur add-on 210 shown in FIG. 21 in ways in addition to the use of VOAs. The type-2 light combiner 222, the two-input, type-1A light combiner 224, the type-2 light distributor 226, and the two-output, type-1 light distributor 228 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light combiner 58, the type-1A light combiner 44, the type-2 light distributor 52, the type-1 light distributor 24, respectively, shown in FIGS. 4B, 3B, 4A, and 2A, although they are not limited thereto. In addition, the VOAs 230, 232, and 234 can be the same as, for example, the VOAs 42 and 48 shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, respectively. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the spur add-on 220 to include components in addition to those shown in FIG. 22. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-2 light combiner 222, the two-input, type-1A light combiner 224, the type-2 light distributor 226, the two-output, type-1 light distributor 228, and the VOAs 230, 232, and 234 shown in FIG. 22 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

FIGS. 23 and 24 show examples of embodiments of type-1A and type-1B spur terminators, respectively. Spur terminators can be used in conjunction with spur add-ons to form an optical spur. The type-1A spur terminator 236 shown in FIG. 23 includes a type-2 light combiner 238 and a type-2 light distributor 240. The type-1B spur terminator 242 shown in FIG. 24 includes a type-2 light combiner 244 and a type-2 light distributor 246, a VOA 248 at the subtending output of the light combiner 244, and a VOA 250 at the subtending input of the light distributor 246. The type-2 light distributors 240 and 246, the type-2 light combiners 238 and 244, and the VOAs 248 and 250 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light distributor 52, the type-2 light combiner 58, and the VOAs 42 and 48 shown respectively in FIGS. 4A, 4B, and 3A and 3B, although they are not limited thereto. Although each type-1A and type-1B spur terminator can include a single type-2 light combiner and a single type-2 distributor, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for these terminators to include multiple type-2 light distributors and type-2 light combiners and/or additional components. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-2 light distributors 240 and 246, the type-2 light combiners 238 and 244, and the VOAs 248 and 250 shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 to be replaced by any other suitable component that performs the functions of these elements. The VOA 248 can be used to simultaneously attenuate all wavelengths exiting the light combiner 244 and the VOA 250 can be used to simultaneously attenuate all wavelengths entering the light distributor 246, although they are not required to do so.

FIG. 25 shows an example embodiment of a simple coupler module 252. The simple coupler module 252 includes one 2-input, type-1 light combiner 254, one 2-output, type-1 light distributor 256, and a VOA 258 in one subtending input of the light combiner 254. The simple coupler module 252 can be used in conjunction with spur terminator modules in order to provide spur add-on functionality, as later discussed and illustrated herein. (See for example, FIGS. 28 and 30 and the corresponding discussion of these figures).

FIG. 26 illustrates an example embodiment of how an optical spur 260 is formed using spur add-ons and spur terminators. The optical spur 260 can include a spur main node 262 and a spur end node 264. The spur main node 262 can include a type-4 west ROADM core device 265, a type-4 east ROADM core device 266, a type-1B west spur add-on 268 and a type-1B east spur add-on 270. The west ROADM core device 265 is connected to the west spur add-on 268 and the east ROADM core device 266 is connected to the east spur add-on 270. The spur end node 264 includes two type-1B spur terminators 272 and 274. The spur terminator 272 is also called the west spur terminator and the spur terminator 274 is also called the east spur terminator. The west spur terminator 272 is connected to the west spur add-on 268, while the east spur terminator 274 is connected to the east spur add-on 270. The type-4 ROADM core devices 265 and 266 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19 (and the type-4 ROADM core devices 265 and 266 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 except for the number of subtending inputs and outputs), although they are not limited thereto. The type-1B spur add-ons 268 and 270, and the two type-1B spur terminators 272 and 274 can be the same as, for example, the type-1B spur add-on 220 and the type-1B spur terminator 242, respectively, shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, although they are not limited thereto. In addition, VOAs 268 i, 268 j, 270 i, and 270 j can be the same as, for example, the VOAs 42 and 48 shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the optical spur 260 to include additional optical elements not shown in FIG. 26. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 265 and 266, the type-TB spur add-ons 268 and 270, and the two type-1B spur terminators 272 and 274 shown in FIG. 26 to be replaced by any other suitable component that performs the functions of these elements. The optical spur 260 also includes the fiber between the spur add-ons and the spur terminators. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the spur end node 264 to be located a substantial distance from the spur main node 262 (tens or hundreds of kilometers), although it is not required for the spur end node 264 to be so located. As a result, the distance between the ROADM core devices 265 and 266 and the spur add-ons 268 and 270 is substantially closer than the distance between the spur main node 262 and the spur end node 264. The west spur add-on 268 and the east spur add-on 270 include DWDM spur interfaces 268 a (spur interface #1) and 270 a (spur interface #2), respectively, through which optical signals can be transmitted to and received from the spur end node. The west spur add-on 268 and the east spur add-on 270 also include DWDM main interfaces 268 b (main interface #1) and 270 b (main interface #2), also called DWDM line interfaces, through which optical signals can be transmitted to and received from the ROADM core devices 265 and 266. In addition, the term “spur interface” as used in this application can also be used to generically describe both the DWDM spur interface and the DWDM main interface of a given spur add-on. It should be understood that the other example embodiments of optical spurs discussed below can also include DWDM spur interfaces and DWDM main interfaces.

The optical spur 260 shown in FIG. 26 is a “protected spur”, which means that two fiber paths can be provided from the spur main node 262 to the spur end node 264, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment, to include more than two such fiber paths or in an alternative example embodiment, only one fiber path. From FIG. 26 it can be seen that a copy of all wavelengths arriving at the network node interface 265 a (network node interface #1) at the west ROADM core device 265 can be forwarded to the spur end node 264 via the path through the type-1 light distributor 265 b within the west ROADM core device 265, through the type-1 light combiner 268 c in the west spur add-on 268, and down the fiber to the type-2 light distributor 272 b within the west spur terminator 272. Similarly, a copy of all wavelengths arriving on DWDM network node interface 266 a (network node interface #2) of the east ROADM core device 266 can forwarded to the spur end node 264 via the path through the type-1 light distributor 266 b in the east ROADM core device 266, through the type-1 light combiner 270 c in the east spur add-on 270, and down the fiber to the type-2 light distributor 274 b within the east spur terminator 274. At the spur terminators 272 and 274, all m wavelengths supported by the ROADM network of which the optical spur 260 is a part may be dropped via the type-2 light distributors 272 b and 274 b within the spur terminators 272 and 274. The optical network of which the optical spur 260 is a part can be configured so that a working copy of a given wavelength arrives at one DWDM main interface (one of the interface 268 b on the west spur add-on 268 and the interface 270 b the east spur add-on 270) within the spur main node 262, and a duplicate copy is received at the other DWDM line interface (the other of the interface 268 b of the west spur add-on 268 and the interface 270 b the east spur add-on 270) within the spur main node 262. Therefore, one copy of the wavelength is sent to the west spur terminator 272 and the other copy of the wavelength is sent to the east spur terminator 274. Since there are two copies of a given wavelength available at the spur end node 264, if one of the two fiber pairs connecting the spur end node 264 to the spur main node 262 is cut or otherwise damaged, one fiber pair will remain intact in order to send the remaining copy of the wavelength to the spur end node 264.

It can also be seen from FIG. 26 that wavelengths may be “added” at the spur end node 264 and be forwarded back to the spur main node 262 via two parallel paths. For instance, a given wavelength may be added to the west spur terminator 272 at the add ports 272 c (denoted as “adds” in FIG. 26), where they can be combined by the type-2 light combiner 272 a and sent up the spur fiber to the west spur add-on 268. An identical copy of the added wavelength may be added to the east spur terminator 274 at the add ports 274 c (denoted as “adds” in FIG. 26), where they can be combined by the type-2 light combiner 274 a and sent up the fiber spur to the east spur add-on 270. Once the two copies of the added wavelength arrive at the spur add-ons 268 and 270, duplicate copies can be made at the add-ons 268 and 270 via the type-1 light distributors 268 d and 270 d within the spur add-ons 268 and 270, respectively, and one copy is dropped out of each of the two spur add-ons 268 and 270 via the type-2 light distributors 268 e and 270 e and the drop ports 268 f and 270 f (denoted in FIG. 26 as “drops”), and one copy is sent to each of the ROADM core devices 265 and 266 from the type-1 light distributors 268 d and 270 d. The type-4 light combiner 265 c of the ROADM core device 265 can combine the “added” wavelength from the spur end node 264 with any other wavelengths added at an add port of the ROADM core device 265 and combined by a type-2 light combiner thereof and with any other wavelengths received from the network node interface 266 a distributed by the type-1 light distributor 266 b of the ROADM core device 266. Similarly, the type-4 light combiner 266 c of the ROADM core device 266 can combine the “added” wavelength from the spur end node 264 with any other wavelengths added at an add port of the ROADM core device 266 and combined by a type-2 light combiner thereof and with any other wavelengths received from the network node interface 265 a distributed by the type-1 light distributor 265 b of the ROADM core device 265.

The above example embodiment illustrates how wavelengths can be directed to a main node from a spur end node and how wavelengths can be directed from a main node to a spur end node. The spur add-ons 268 and 270 also include the ability to add wavelengths to the optical spur 260 at the spur main node 262. This is accomplished by inserting added wavelengths into the type-2 light combiner 268 g from add ports 268 h within the spur add-on 268 and/or inserting added wavelengths into the type-2 light combiner 270 g from the add ports 270 h within the spur add-on 270. The added wavelengths can be then combined with any wavelengths from the corresponding ROADM core device (265 or 266), and sent down the spur fiber, where they can be dropped via the type-2 light distributor (272 b or 274 b) within corresponding the spur terminator (272 or 274) (along with wavelengths from the corresponding ROADM core device (265 or 266)). Similarly, wavelengths added at one of spur terminators 272 and 274 at the spur end node 264 may be dropped at their corresponding spur add-on (268 or 270), and blocked from leaving the corresponding DWDM network node interface (265 a or 266 a) of the corresponding ROADM core device (265 or 266) by setting to zero, the attenuation coefficient of the appropriate VOA (not shown) within the type-4 light combiner (265 c or 266 c) within that corresponding ROADM core device (265 or 266). Transport traffic that is transported exclusively between the spur main node 262 and the spur end node 264 will be referred to as spur “local traffic”.

Since, wavelengths from the DWDM line interfaces (265 a, 266 a) of the ROADM core devices (265, 266) can be passively coupled with the added wavelengths from the spur add-ons (268, 270), wavelengths added at the spur add-ons (268, 270) must be different than those input into the optical spur 260 from the DWDM line interfaces (265 a, 266 a) of the ROADM core devices (265, 266). In a typical application, some number of wavelengths may be “reserved” for local traffic that is transported solely between the spur main node 262 and its corresponding spur end node 264. These reserved wavelengths may be “reused” on each optical spur of the DWDM network of which the optical spur 260 is a part, since they are never used on the main DWDM network artery of the DWDM network.

To more clearly illustrate the concept of the reuse of wavelengths within a network having optical spurs, FIG. 27 is provided. FIG. 27 shows a DWDM network in the form of a ring network 276 including Nodes 278 (node 1), 280 (node 2), 282 (node 3), and 284 (node 4) that form a ring, and nodes 286 (node 5) and 288 (node 6), which are connected to one of the nodes in the ring and may be a remote distance (e.g., tens of kilometers) from the ring, i.e., substantially further than the distance between the nodes within the ring, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for nodes 5 and 6 to be as close to the nodes in the ring as the nodes in the ring are to each other. Also, the spur end nodes may be closer to the ring then the nodes within the ring are to each other. Nodes 5 and 6 are spur end nodes and are connected, respectively, to nodes 1 and 4, which are spur main nodes. Nodes 1 and 5 together form an optical spur, and nodes 4 and 6 together form another optical spur. One of ordinary skill in the art would understand that a failure in a link between a spur main node (e.g., Node 4) and a spur end node (e.g., Node 6) would not disrupt traffic between the nodes forming the ring (e.g., Nodes 1 through 4). It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the ring network 276 to include additional elements not shown in FIG. 27 or to include fewer nodes than is shown in FIG. 27. In the event the ring network 276 uses wavelengths 1 through m, wavelengths 1 to 4 could be reserved for spur “local traffic” (between nodes 1 and 5 and between nodes 4 and 6 only) while traffic transported between all other node pairs may use wavelengths 5 through m, where m is the total number of wavelengths available on the DWDM network. Since, wavelengths 1 to 4 are never placed on the main ring (artery) connecting nodes 1 through 4, wavelengths 1 to 4 may be used to transport traffic between nodes 1 and 5 only, and then the same wavelengths may be reused to transport traffic between nodes 4 and 6 only. It should be noted that traffic between a given spur end node and any network node other than the corresponding spur main node would utilize a wavelength between wavelengths 5 and m. For instance, traffic from node 5 to node 3 would not use wavelengths 1 to 4 (in this example), but would instead use wavelengths 5 to m. Similarly traffic from node 5 to node 6 would use wavelengths 5 to m (in this example where wavelengths 1 to 4 are reserved for spur “local traffic”).

In FIG. 26, it can be noted that there are two VOAs in the add path of each spur add-on (268 and 270). One VOA (268 i, 270 i) is positioned between the type-2 light combiner (268 g, 270 g) at which wavelengths are added and the type-1 light combiner (268 c, 270 c), which combines wavelengths added at the spur add-on with wavelengths from the ROADM core device (265, 266). The other VOA (268 j, 270 j) is positioned at the subtending input of the type-1 light combiner (268 c, 270 c) of the spur add-on (268, 270) that receives an optical signal from the DWDM line interface (265 a, 266 a) of the ROADM core device (265 or 266). These VOAs 268 i, 268 j, 270 i, 270 j can be used to “coarsely” power equalize the locally added wavelengths with those wavelengths from the corresponding DWDM line interface (265 a, 266 a) of the corresponding ROADM core device (265, 266) before they are combined by the type-1 combiner (268 c, 270 c) within the spur add-on (268, 270), although they are not required to do so. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the wavelengths from the DWDM line interface (265 a, 266 a) to be attenuated by a substantial amount by the type-1 light distributor (265 b, 266 b) within the ROADM core device (265, 266), and therefore will be at a much lower power level than the wavelengths added at the spur add-on (268, 270), though it is not required. This means that in this case, the wavelengths added at the spur add-on (268, 270) will need to be attenuated to match the lower optical power associated with the wavelengths from the ROADM core devices (265, 266). In an alternative implementation of the type-1B spur add-on, there may a single VOA. It is positioned between the type-2 light combiner (268 g, 270 g) at which wavelengths are added and the type-1 light combiner (268 c, 270 c) within each spur add-on (268, 270). It should be noted that although the type-1B spur terminator is used in FIG. 26 (with an internal VOA), a type-1A terminator could also be used, since there is often no need for the VOA at the spur end node 264.

Since the type-1B spur add-ons (268, 270) shown in FIG. 26 employ a type-1A light combiner (268 c, 270 c), a type-1 light distributor (268 d, 270 d), a type-2 light combiner (268 g, 270 g), a type-2 light distributor (268 e, 270 e), and VOAs (268 i, 268 j, 270 i, 270 j) the type-TB spur add-on can be configured to: 1) combine into a combined signal with the type-1A light combiner (268 c, 270 c) a) a multiple-wavelength, attenuated optical signal generated by combining, with the type-2 light combiner (268 h, 270 h), single-wavelength optical signals added from a plurality of colored add ports (268 h, 270 h) (denoted by “Adds” in FIG. 26) into a multiple-wavelength optical signal and attenuating, with the VOA (268 i, 270 i), the multiple-wavelength optical signal, and b) a multiple-wavelength, attenuated optical signal generated by receiving a multiple-wavelength optical signal from the network node interface (265 a, 266 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (265, 266) and attenuating the multiple-wavelength optical signal from the network node interface (265 a, 266 a) via ROADM core device (265, 266) with another VOA (268 j, 270 j); 2) output the combined signal from the spur interface (268 a, 270 a) to the spur end node 264 with the type-1A light combiner (268 c, 270 c); and 3) divide, with the type-1 light distributor (268 d, 270 d), a multiple-wavelength optical signal, received by the spur interface (268 a, 270 a) from the spur end node 264, into a plurality of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals, one of which is output to one of the ROADM core devices (265, 266) and then to the network node interface (265 a, 266 a), and another of which is divided, by the type-2 light distributor (268 e, 270 e), into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals output to the plurality of colored drop ports (268 f, 270 f) (denoted by “m Drops” in FIG. 26). It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the FIG. 26 example embodiment to employ a type-1A spur add-on (which can be the same as, for example, the type-1A spur add-on 210 shown in FIG. 21, although it is not limited thereto) instead of a type-TB spur add-on. Since this type-1A spur add-on does not employ VOAs, but employs a type-1 light combiner, a type-1 light distributor, a type-2 light combiner, and a type-2 light distributor, the processing of the signals therethrough can be the same as the processing of signals by the type-1B spur add-ons 268 and 270, as noted above, except for the attenuation operations, which may not be performed.

Since the type-TB spur terminators (272, 274) each include a type-2 light distributor (272 b, 274 b), a VOA (272 d, 274 d), and a type-2 light combiner (272 a, 274 a), the spur terminators 272 and 274 can be configured to: 1) receive a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals from a plurality of colored add ports (272 c, 274 c) (denoted by “Adds” in FIG. 26), combine the plurality of single-wavelength optical signals from the plurality of colored add ports (272 c, 274 c) into a multiple-wavelength optical signal, attenuate the multiple-wavelength optical signal with the VOA (272 d, 274 d), and output the attenuated, multiple-wavelength optical signal to the spur interface (268 a, 270 a) of one the spur add-on (268, 270); and 2) receive a multiple-wavelength optical signal from the spur interface (268 a, 270 a) of the spur add-on (268, 270), separate the multiple-wavelength optical signal from the spur interface (268 a, 270 a) into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-2 light distributor (272 b, 274 b), and output the plurality of single-wavelength optical signals to a plurality of colored drop ports (272 e, 274 e) (denoted by “m Drops” in FIG. 26) so as to output each single-wavelength optical signal to only one pre-assigned drop port (272 e, 274 d), different from the drop ports to which the other single-wavelength optical signals are output.

It is within the scope of this example embodiment, to use a type-1A spur terminator (which may be the same as, for example, the type-1A spur terminator 236 shown in FIG. 23, although it is not limited thereto) instead of the type-1B spur terminator (272, 274) in the optical spur 260 shown in FIG. 26. Since this type-1A spur terminator may not employ a VOA, but employs a type-2 light combiner, and a type-2 light distributor, the processing of the signals therethrough can be the same as for the use of the type-TB spur terminator (272, 274), as discussed above, except for the attenuation operation, which may not be performed.

It will later be shown that a type-4 ROADM core device could be used in place of the spur add-ons and spur terminators (according to the example embodiment shown in FIG. 36), but using type-4 ROADM core devices is a much more costly solution, because the type-4 light combiners are complex and thus costly optical components.

FIG. 28 depicts an example embodiment of an apparatus with the same functionality as in FIG. 26, with the exception that the spur add-on in the spur main node is divided into two separate physical circuit modules: a type-1B spur terminator module, and a simple coupler module. Such a solution provides a very low-cost optical spur 290 that does not require local traffic, since, for such a case, only the simple coupler module is needed within the spur main node, i.e., the spur terminator is not used and need not be present in the spur main node. However, placing the simple coupler module within the spur main node (rather than running fiber directly from the ROADM core device to the spur end node) enables the hitless addition of spur local traffic at some later date, by simply adding the spur terminator module. Thus, for the initial deployment of the spur (prior to local traffic), the network implementer could incur the cost of the simple coupler module within the spur main node without incurring the cost of the spur terminator within the spur main node. FIG. 28 illustrates the case of full deployment, once the spur terminator module is added. But it should be understood that the optical spur 290 can be used without the spur terminators in the spur main node. FIG. 28 shows the optical spur 290, which includes a spur main node 292 and a spur end node 294. The spur main node 292 can include a type-4 west ROADM core device 296, a type-4 east ROADM core device 298, a west spur add-on 300 including a type-1B west spur terminator 302 connected to a west simple coupler module 304, and an east spur add-on 306 including a type-1B east spur terminator 308 connected to an east simple coupler module 310. The west ROADM core device 296 is connected to the west spur add-on 300 via the west simple coupler module 304, and the east ROADM core device 298 is connected to the east spur add-on 306 via the east simple coupler module 310. The spur end node 294 includes two type-1B spur terminators 312 and 314. The spur terminator 312 is also called the west spur terminator and the spur terminator 314 is also called the east spur terminator. The west spur terminator 312 is connected to the west spur add-on 300 via the west simple coupler module 304, while the east spur terminator 314 is connected to the east spur add-on 306 via the east simple coupler module 310. The type-4 ROADM core devices 296 and 298 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1B spur terminators 302, 308, 312, and 314 can be the same as, for example, the type-TB spur terminator 242 shown in FIG. 24, although they are not limited thereto. The simple coupler modules 304 and 310 can be the same as, for example, the simple coupler module 252 shown in FIG. 25, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the optical spur 290 to include additional components not shown in FIG. 28. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 296 and 298, the type-1B spur terminators 302, 308, 312, and 314, and the simple coupler modules 304 and 310 to be replaced by any other suitable component that performs the functions of these elements.

Since the simple coupler modules 304 and 310 each include a type-1 light distributor (304 a, 310 a), a type-1 light combiner (304 b, 310 b), and a VOA (304 c, 310 c), and since the type-1B spur terminators (302, 308) attached to the simple coupler modules (302, 310) in the spur main node 292 include a type-2 light distributor (302 a, 308 a), a type-2 light combiner (302 b, 308 b), and a VOA (302 c, 308 c), these elements can be configured to: 1) receive and then combine, with the type-2 light combiner (302 b, 308 b) of the type-1B spur terminator (302, 208), a plurality of optical signals added at a plurality of add ports (302 d, 308 d) (denoted by “m Adds” in FIG. 28) into a single optical signal, attenuate the single optical signal with the VOA (302 c, 308 c) of the type-1B spur terminator (302, 308), and direct the attenuated single optical signal to the simple coupler module (304, 308), where the attenuated single optical signal is combined, using the type-1 light combiner (304 b, 310 b), with an optical signal of a plurality of wavelengths received from the network node interface (296 a, 298 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (296,298) to produce a combined signal that is output from the spur interface (304 d, 310 d) to the spur end node 294 with the type-1 light combiner (304 b, 310 b) of the simple coupler module (304, 310), and 2) divide, with the type-1 light distributor (304 a, 310 a) of the simple coupler module (304, 310), a multiple-wavelength optical signal received by the spur interface (304 d, 310 d) from the spur end node 294 into a plurality of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical, one of which is output to the network node interface (296 a, 298 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (296, 298) with the type-1 light distributor (304 a, 310 a) of the simple coupler module (304, 310), and another of which is divided and separated into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals that can be dropped at a plurality of drop ports (302 e, 308 e) (denoted by “Drops” in FIG. 28) with the type-2 light distributor (302 a, 308 a) of the type-1B spur terminator (302, 308). It should be noted that FIG. 28 also denotes the number of add and drop ports in the spur terminators 312 and 314 by the phrase “Adds” and “m Drops”.

FIG. 29 depicts an example of an alternative embodiment of the spur add-on and spur terminators: the type-2 spur add-on, and the type-2 spur terminator. This alternative example embodiment is shown in the context of an optical spur 316 including a spur main node 318 and a spur end node 320. But is should be understood that it is within the scope of this example embodiment, to use the type-2 spur add-on and the type-2 spur terminator in other types of optical spurs and other network elements and nodes. The spur main node 318 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 322, 324, and 326. The type-4 ROADM core devices 322, 324, and 326 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the optical spur 316 to include additional components not shown in FIG. 29. The optical spur 316 also includes two type-2 spur add-ons 328 and 330. The spur end node 320 includes type-2 spur terminators 332 and 334. The manner in which the type-2 spur add-on and the type-2 spur terminator differ from the type-1A and type-1B spur add-ons and spur terminators can be understood from reviewing the example embodiment shown in FIG. 26. From FIG. 26 it can be seen that the add/drop ports (268 f, 268 h, 270 f, 270 h) on the spur add-ons (268, 270) and the add/drop ports (272 c, 272 e, 274 c, 274 e) of the spur terminators (272, 274) were of the colored type (although both the spur add-ons and spur terminators supported “full access” to all m network wavelengths). In contrast, the type-2 spur add-on and type-2 spur terminator provide “colorless” add/drop ports. Typically the number of colorless add/drop ports supported is some number p less than m. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for p to be equal to m. Thus, the number add and drop ports in the spur main node 318 and in the spur end node 320 is denoted in FIG. 29 by the phrases “p Add Ports” and “p Drop Ports”.

This functionality is implemented by using type-4 light distributors and type-1 light combiners. More specifically, the type-2 spur terminators 332 and 334 can each include a type-4 light distributor 336 or 338 (used to selectively drop wavelengths), a type-1 light combiner 340 or 342 (used to add wavelengths), and a VOA 332 a or 334 a. The type-4 light distributors 336 and 338 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 light distributor 76 shown in FIG. 6, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1 light combiners 340 and 342 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light combiner 30 shown in FIG. 2B, although they are not limited thereto. The VOAs 332 a and 334 a can be the same as, for example, the VOAs 42 and 48 shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1 light combiners 340 and 342 allow any wavelength to be added to any add port (332 b, 334 b) of the terminators 332, 334 (i.e., the type-1 light combiners 340 and 342 provide for colorless add ports). The type-4 light distributors 336 and 338 within the spur terminators 332 and 334 provide the ability to direct any received wavelength to any of the p drop ports (332 c, 334 c) of the terminators 332 and 334 (i.e., the distributors 336 and 338 provide for colorless drop ports).

Similarly, the type-2 spur add-ons (328 and 330) can each include a type-4 light distributor (344 or 346) that can be used to provide colorless drop ports (328 a, 330 a) and a type-1 light combiner (348 or 350) that can be used to provide colorless add ports (328 b, 330 b) for the spur local traffic at the spur main node 318. Each type-2 spur add-on (328, 330) also includes another type-1 light combiner (328 c, 330 c), a type-1 light distributor (328 d, 330 d), a VOA (328 e, 330 e) at the input of the type-1 light combiner (328 c, 330 c) that receives an optical signal from one of the type-4 ROADMs (324, 326), and a VOA (328 f, 330 f) at the output of the type-1 light combiner (348, 350). The type-4 light distributors 344 and 346 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 light distributor 76 shown in FIG. 6, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1 light combiners 348, 350, 328 c, 330 c can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light combiner 30 shown in FIG. 2B, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1 light distributors 328 d and 330 d can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light distributor 24 shown in FIG. 2A, although they are not limited thereto. The VOAs 328 e, 328 f, 330 e, and 330 f can be the same as, for example, the VOAs 42 and 48 shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, although they are not limited thereto.

It can also be noted in FIG. 29 that the spur main node 318 is a 3-degree node, thus illustrating how the subtending inputs and outputs of ROADM core devices 322, 324, and 326 can be utilized for different purposes within a given DWDM node. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 322, 324, 326, the type-2 spur add-ons 328, 330, and the type-2 spur terminators 332, 334 shown in FIG. 29 to be replaced by any other suitable component that performs the functions of these elements.

Since the type-2 spur add-on includes two type-1 light combiners, a type-1 light distributor, a type-4 light distributor, and two VOAs, these add-ons 328 and 330 can be configured to: 1) combine a plurality of optical signals added at a plurality of colorless add ports (328 b, 330 b) (denoted by “p Add Ports” in FIG. 29) into a single optical signal with one of the type-1 light combiners (348, 350); 2) attenuate the single optical signal with one of the VOAs (328 f, 330 f); 3) combine the attenuated single optical signal with an optical signal of a plurality of wavelengths a) received from the network node interface (324 a, 326 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (324, 326) and b) attenuated by the other VOA (328 e, 330 e) after being received, to produce a combined signal that is output from the spur interface (328 g, 330 g) to the spur end node 320 with the other type-1 light combiner (328 c, 330 c); 4) divide a multiple-wavelength optical signal received by the spur interface (328 g, 330 g) from the spur end node 320 into a plurality of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals with the type-1 light distributor (328 d, 330 d); 5) output one of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals to the network node interface (324 a, 326 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (324, 326) with the type-1 light distributor (328 d, 330 d); and 6) with the type-4 light distributor (344, 346) separate another one of the optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals, change the intensity of at least one of the single-wavelength optical signals, and assign and output each of the single-wavelength optical signals to any one of and only one of a plurality of colorless drop ports (328 a, 330 a) (denoted by “p Drop Ports” in FIG. 29).

Since the type-2 spur terminators (332, 334) include a type-1 light combiner (340, 342) and a type-4 light distributor (336, 338), the type-2 spur terminators 332 and 334 can be configured to: 1) receive a plurality of optical signals from a plurality of colorless add ports (332 b, 334 b) (denoted by “p Add Ports”) with the type-1 light combiner (340, 342); 2) combine the plurality of optical signals from the plurality of colorless add ports (332 b, 334 b) into a single optical signal with the type-1 light combiner (340, 342); 3) attenuate the single optical signal with the VOA (332 a, 334 a); 4) output the attenuated, single optical signal to the spur interface (328 g, 330 g) of one of the spur add-ons (328, 330); 5) receive a multiple-wavelength optical signal from the spur interface (328 g, 330 g) of the spur add-on (328, 330) with the type-4 light distributor (336, 338); 6) divide the multiple-wavelength optical signal from the spur interface (328 g, 330 g) into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light distributor (336, 338); 7) individually attenuate the plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light distributor (336, 338); and 8) assign each of the individually attenuated single-wavelength optical signals to any one of and only one of a plurality of drop ports (332 c, 334 c) (denoted by “p Drop Ports”), and output each individually attenuated single-wavelength optical signal from a different assigned drop port (332 c, 334 c) with the type-4 light distributor (336, 338).

FIG. 30 shows an example embodiment of a configuration that is functionally identical to that shown in FIG. 29, except for the physical partitioning of the type-2 spur add-on functionality across two modules: a simple coupler module and a type-2 spur terminator module. As was the case for the FIG. 28 configuration, the FIG. 30 configuration provides for a low-cost means of providing spur capability within the spur main node for cases where spur local traffic is not initially required, while providing a hitless procedure of adding spur local traffic at some later date. It should be noted that the spur add-ons used within the spur main node may have colorless add/drop ports, while the spur terminators within the spur end nodes may have colored add/drop ports, or vice versa. Alternatively, both the spur add-ons in the spur main node and the spur terminators within the spur end node may have colorless add/drop ports or colored add/drop ports. FIG. 30 illustrates the case of full deployment, once the spur terminator module is added. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment to partially deploy the type-2 spur add-on functionality by omitting the type-2 spur terminator in the main node. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment to employ the combination of a simple coupler module and a type-2 spur terminator in a different type of optical spur than the optical spur 352 shown in FIG. 30, and it is within the scope of this example embodiment to employ this combination in other nodes and network elements. Accordingly, FIG. 30 shows an optical spur 352 including a spur main node 354 and a spur end node 356. The spur main node 354 can include three type-4 ROADM core devices 358, 360, and 362, a west spur add-on 364 including a type-2 west spur terminator 366 connected to a west simple coupler module 368, and an east spur add-on 370 including a type-2 east spur terminator 372 connected to an east simple coupler module 374. The ROADM core device 360 is connected to the west spur add-on 364 via the west simple coupler module 368, and the ROADM core device 362 is connected to the east spur add-on 370 via the east simple coupler module 374. The spur end node 256 includes two type-2 spur terminators 376 and 378. The spur terminator 376 is connected to the west spur add-on 364 via the west simple coupler module 368, while the spur terminator 378 is connected to the east spur add-on 370 via the east simple coupler module 374. The type-4 ROADM core devices 358, 360, and 362 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The type-2 spur terminators 366, 372, 376, and 378 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 spur terminators 332 and 334 shown in FIG. 29, although they are not limited thereto. The simple coupler modules 368 and 374 can be the same as, for example, the simple coupler module 252 shown in FIG. 25, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the optical spur 352 to include additional components not shown in FIG. 30. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 358, 360, and 362, the type-2 spur terminators 366, 372, 376, and 378, and the simple coupler modules 368 and 374 shown in FIG. 30 to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

Since type-2 spur terminators 366 and 372 of the spur add-ons 364 and 370 include a type-1 light combiner (366 a, 372 a), a VOA (366 b, 372 b), and a type-4 light distributor (366 c, 372 c), and the simple couplers include a type-1 light combiner (368 a, 374 a), a type-1 light distributor (368 b, 374 b), and a VOA (368 c, 374 c), these spur terminators 366 and 372 can be configured to: 1) receive a plurality of optical signals from a plurality of colorless add ports (366 d, 372 d) (denoted by “p Adds” in FIG. 30) with the type-1 light combiner (366 a, 372 a); 2) combine the plurality of optical signals from the plurality of colorless add ports (366 d, 372 d) into a single optical signal with the type-1 light combiner (366 a, 372 a); 3) attenuate the single optical signal with the VOA (366 b, 372 b), and output the attenuated, single optical signal to the simple coupler module (368, 374), which combines the attenuated, single optical signal with a multiple-wavelength optical signal received by the spur interface (368 d, 374 d) from the network node interface (360 a, 362 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (360, 362) to produce a combined signal with the type-1 light distributor (368 a, 374 a), and outputs the combined signal, produced by combining the attenuated, single optical signal with the multiple-wavelength optical signal received by the spur interface (368 d, 374 d) from the network node interface (360 a, 362 a), to the spur end node 356 with the type-1 light distributor (368 a, 374 a); 4) receive an optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signal from the simple coupler module (368, 374), which is produced by the type-1 light distributor (368 b, 374 b) of the simple coupler module (368, 374) receiving a multiple-wavelength optical signal from the spur end node 356, dividing the multiple-wavelength optical signal from the spur end node 356 into a plurality of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals, one of which is output from the spur interface (368 d, 374 d) to the network node interface (360 a, 362 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (360, 362), and another of which is transmitted to the spur terminator (366, 372); 5) separate the optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signal received from the simple coupler module (368, 374) into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light distributor (366 c, 372 c); 6) individually attenuate the plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light distributor (366 c, 372 c); and 7) assign and output each of the individually attenuated plurality of single-wavelength optical signals to any one of and only one of a plurality of different colorless drop ports (366 e, 372 e) (denoted as “p Drops” in FIG. 30).

FIG. 31 shows an example of an embodiment of a wavelength “blocker” element 380. The wavelength blocker element 380 includes a type-2 light distributor 382 (which can be used to demultiplex the incoming DWDM light stream), a set of m VOAs 384 in the subtending outputs of the light distributor 382 (which can be used to power equalize wavelengths outputted from the light distributor 382 or extinguish them completely), and a type-2 light combiner 386 (which can be used to multiplex the outgoing wavelengths output on the subtending outputs of the light distributor 382 into a DWDM light stream). The type-2 light distributor 382, the VOAs 384, and the type-2 light combiner 386 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light distributor 52, the VOAs 42 and/or 48, and the type-2 light combiner 58, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 4A, 3A, 3B, and 4B, although they are not limited thereto. In addition, the wavelength blocker 380 can include additional elements not shown in FIG. 31. Also, it is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the wavelength blocker 380 and its component parts to be replaced by any other suitable component (or components) that perform (or perform) the functions thereof.

FIG. 32 shows an example embodiment of one application of the wavelength blocker element to form a type-3 spur add-on in the context of an optical spur 388 including a spur main node 390 and a spur end node 392. But it should be understood that it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the type-3 spur add-on to be used in an optical spur different from the optical spur 388, and to be used in other optical nodes and network elements. The type-3 spur add-on is formed by adding a wavelength blocker, such as the wavelength blocker 380 shown in FIG. 31, for example, to a type-1B spur add-on, such as the type-1B spur add-on 220 shown in FIG. 22, for example. But it should be understood that the type-3 spur add-on is not limited to the use of these specific components. Other components can be used as long as they perform the functions of the wavelength blocker 380 and the type-1B spur add-on 220. The spur main node 390 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 394, 396, and 398, and two type-3 spur add-ons 400 and 402. The spur end node 392 includes two type-1B spur terminators 404 and 406. The type-4 ROADM core devices 394, 396, and 398, can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The two type-1B spur terminators 404 and 406 can be the same as, for example, the type-TB spur terminator 242 in FIG. 24, although they are not limited thereto. As shown in FIG. 32, each of the type-3 spur add-ons 400, 402 includes a wavelength blocker (408, 410) placed at the subtending input of a type-1 light combiner (400 a, 402 a) that receives a multiple-wavelength optical signal from a type-1 light distributor (396 a, 398 a) of a type-4 ROADM core device (396, 398). Each of the type-3 spur add-ons 400, 402 can also include a type-2 light combiner (400 b, 402 b), a VOA (400 c, 402 c), a type-2 light distributor (400 d, 402 d), and a type-1 light distributor (400 e, 402 e). The wavelength blockers 408 and 410 can be the same as, for example, the wavelength blocker 380 shown in FIG. 31, although they are not limited thereto. The type-2 light combiners 400 b and 402 b can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light combiner 58 shown in FIG. 4B, although they are not limited thereto. The VOAs 400 c and 402 c can be the same as, for example, the VOAs 42 and/or 48 shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, although they are not limited thereto. The type-2 light distributors 400 d and 402 d can be the same as, for example, the type-2 light distributor 52 shown in FIG. 4A, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1 light distributors 400 e and 402 e can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light distributor 24 shown in FIG. 2A, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment to replace any of the type-1 light combiners (400 a, 402 a), the type-2 light distributors (400 d, 402 d), the type-2 light combiners (400 b, 402 b), the type-1 light distributors (400 e, 402 e), and the VOAs (400 c, 402 c) with any other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof. The wavelength blockers 408 and 410 can be configured to prevent unneeded wavelengths from being directed to the spur end node 392, although they are not required to do so. The type-3 spur add-ons 400 and 402 can be configured to enable wavelengths that are used on the main artery of a DWMD network of which the optical spur 388 is a part to be reused for spur local traffic. With this type of spur add-on, it is no longer necessary to reserve a set of wavelengths for spur local traffic use. For instance, if wavelengths 1 through 5 are passing through the spur main node 390 from network node interface 396 b (also called network node interface #1) of the ROADM core device 396 to the network node interface 398 b (also called the network node interface #2) of the ROADM core device 398, but there is no need to send the data within these pass-through wavelengths down to the spur end node 392, then wavelengths 1 through 5 can be reused to carry spur local traffic from the spur main node 390 to the spur end node 392. This function is enabled by the wavelength blockers 408 and 410 within the spur add-ons 400 and 402, since the wavelength blockers 408 and 410 can be configured to block wavelengths 1 to 5 from passing from the network node interfaces 396 b and 398 b to the spur end node 392. In the reverse direction, the wavelengths that are transporting local traffic from the spur end node 392 to the spur main node 390 can be blocked from being applied to the main DWDM network artery of which the optical spur 388 is a part by the type-4 light combiner (396 c, 398 c) in one of the ROADM core devices (396, 398).

Since the type-3 spur add-ons 400 and 402 each include a type-1 light combiner (400 a, 402 a), a type-2 light distributor (400 d, 402 d), a type-2 light combiner (400 b, 402 b), a type-1 light distributor (400 e, 402 e), a VOA (400 c, 402 c), and a wavelength blocker (408, 410), these type-3 spur add-ons can be configured to: 1) combine single-wavelength optical signals added from a plurality of colored add ports (400 f, 402 f) (denoted as “Adds” in FIG. 32) into a first multiple-wavelength optical signal with the type-2 light combiner (400 b, 402 b); 2) attenuate the first multiple-wavelength optical signal with the VOA (400 c, 402 c); 3) combine, with the type-1 light combiner (400 a, 402 a) a) the attenuated first multiple-wavelength optical signal, and b) a second optical signal received by the spur interface (400 g, 402 g) from the network node interface (396 b, 398 b) via one of the ROADM core devices (396, 398), at least one wavelength of which can be blocked from being combined with the attenuated, first multiple-wavelength optical signal by the wavelength blocker (408, 410); 4) output from type-1 light combiner (400 a, 402 a) to the spur interface (400 h, 402 h) and then from the spur interface (400 h, 402 h) to the spur end node 392 an optical signal resulting from combining the attenuated, first multiple-wavelength optical signal with the second optical signal received from the network node interface (396 b, 398 b) at least one wavelength of which has passed through the wavelength blocker (408, 410); 5) divide a multiple-wavelength optical signal received by the spur interface (400 h, 402 h) from the spur end node 392 into a plurality of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals with the type-1 light distributor (400 e, 402 e), which outputs one of the optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals to the spur interface (400 g, 402 g), which in turn outputs that optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signal to the network node interface (396 b, 398 b) via one of the ROADM core devices (396, 398), and 6) divide another of the optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals output by the type-1 light distributor (400 e, 402 e) into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-2 light distributor (400 d, 402 d), which also outputs each of the single-wavelength optical signals to a different, pre-assigned colored drop port (400 i, 402 i) (denoted by “Drops” in FIG. 32).

FIG. 33 illustrates an example of an embodiment of a type-4 spur add-on in the context of an optical spur 412 including a spur main node 414 and a spur end node 416. But is should be understood that it is within the scope of this an example embodiment to use the type-4 spur add-on in other types of optical spurs and in various network elements and nodes. Although the optical spur 412 as shown in FIG. 33 includes the spur main node 414 and the spur end node 416, it is within the scope of this example embodiment to employ additional components in the optical spur 412. The spur main node 414 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 418, 420, and 422, and two type-4 spur add-ons 424 and 426. The spur end node 416 includes two type-2 spur terminators 428 and 430. The type-4 ROADM core devices 418, 420, and 422, can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The two type-2 spur terminators 428 and 430 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 spur terminators 332 and 334 in FIG. 29, although they are not limited thereto. Each type-4 spur add-on 424 and 426 is a colorless version of the type-3 spur add-on; it also includes a wavelength blocker, but provides for colorless add/drop ports. This functionality is implemented by using two light distributors, two light combiners, a wavelength blocker, and a VOA in each type-4 spur add-on 424 and 426, though it is not limited to using these specific components to provide this functionality. More specifically, in the type-4 spur add-on 424, one of the light distributors can include a type-1 light distributor 432 that can divide multiple-wavelength optical signals received from the type-2 spur terminator 428 after passing through the spur interface 424 a into a plurality of optical-power divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals, one of which is output from the spur interface 424 b to the network node interface 420 a via the type-4 ROADM core device 420. The other light distributor can be a type-4 light distributor 434 that can be configured to divide another of the optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals output by the type-1 light distributor 432 into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals, and change the intensity of the single-wavelength optical signals, and can be programmed to direct each of the single-wavelength optical signals to any of and only one of a plurality of different drop ports 424 c (denoted by “p Drop Ports” in FIG. 33) of the type-4 spur add-on 424. One of the light combiners of the type-4 spur add-on 424 can include a type-1 light combiner 436 that can be configured to combine single-wavelength optical signals added from a plurality of colorless add ports 424 d (denoted by “p Add Ports” in FIG. 33) of the spur add-on 424 into a first multiple-wavelength optical signal. The VOA 438 can attenuate the first multiple-wavelength optical signal output from the type-1 light combiner 436, though it is not required to do so. The other light combiner can be a type-1 light combiner 440 that can be configured to combine the attenuated first multiple-wavelength optical signal with an optical signal, received by the spur interface 424 b from the network node interface 420 a via the ROADM core device 420, at least one wavelength of which can be blocked from being combined with the attenuated, first multiple-wavelength optical signal by a wavelength blocker 442, and outputs from the spur interface 424 a to the spur end node 416 an optical signal resulting from combining the attenuated, first multiple-wavelength optical signal with an optical signal received from the network node interface 420 a via the ROADM core device 420. The type-1 light distributor 432 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light distributor 24 shown in FIG. 2A, although it is not limited thereto. The type-4 light distributor 434 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 light distributor 76 shown in FIG. 6, although it is not limited thereto. The type-1 light combiner 436 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light combiner 30 shown in FIG. 2B, although it is not limited thereto. The VOA 438 can be the same as, for example, the VOAs 42 and/or 48 shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, although it is not limited thereto. The type-1 light combiner 440 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 light combiner 30 shown in FIG. 2B, although it is not limited thereto. In addition, the type-4 spur add-on 426 can have the same structure, and function the same as, for example, the type-4 spur add-on 424 with respect to the ROADM core device 422 and the spur terminator 430, although it is not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment for any of the components of the type-4 spur add-on 424 (the light combiners 436 and 440, the light distributors 432 and 434, the wavelength blocker 442, and the VOA 438) to be replaced with another suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

FIG. 34 illustrates an example embodiment of a type-5 spur add-on in the context of an optical spur 444 including a spur main node 446 and a spur end node 448. It should be understood, however, that it is within the scope of this example embodiment to use the type-5 spur add-on with other optical spurs, nodes, and network elements. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment, for the optical spur 444 to employ additional components not shown in FIG. 34. The spur main node 446 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 450, 452, and 454, and two type-5 spur add-ons 456 and 458. The spur end node 448 includes two type-2 spur terminators 460 and 462. The type-5 spur add-on can provide the same functionality as the type-4 spur add-on, except that it replaces the type-1 light combiner, the VOA, and the wavelength blocker with a type-4 light combiner, though it is not limited to providing the same functionality as the type-4 spur add-on. Therefore, the type-5 spur add-on also can enable the reuse of the main DWDM artery wavelengths for the spur local traffic. In addition, the type-5 spur add-on can provide individual wavelength power equalizing for all wavelengths exiting the spur add-ons 456 and 458 towards the spur end node 448, though it is not required to do so. The three type-4 ROADM core devices 450, 452, and 454, can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The two type-2 spur terminators 460 and 462 can be the same as, for example, the type-2 spur terminators 332 and 334 in FIG. 29, although they are not limited thereto. The type-5 spur add-ons (456, 458) each include a type-4 light combiner (456 a, 458 a), a type-1 light distributor (456 b, 458 b), and a type-4 light distributor (456 c, 458 c). The type-1 light distributors (456 b, 458 b) and the type-4 light distributors (456 c, 458 c) can be the same as, for example, the type-1 and type-4 light distributors 432 and 434, respectively, of the type-4 spur add-on 424, shown in FIG. 33, though they are not limited thereto. The type-1 light distributors (456 b, 458 b) and the type-4 light distributors (456 c, 458 c) can also be the same as, for example, the type-1 light distributor 24 and the type-4 light distributor 76, respectively, shown in FIGS. 2A and 6, though they are not limited thereto. The type-4 light combiners (456 a, 458 a) can be the same as, for example, the type-4 light combiner 88 shown in FIG. 7, although they are not limited thereto. Thus, the type-4 light combiners (456 a, 458 a) of the type-5 spur add-ons (456, 458) can be configured to: 1) receive a first optical signal from a network node interface (452 a, 454 a) via one of the ROADM core devices (452, 454); 2) receive second optical signals from add ports (456 d, 458 d) (denoted as “p Add Ports” in FIG. 34) of the type-5 spur add-ons (456, 458), and separate or divide the first and second optical signals into a first plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the first optical signal and a second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the second optical signal; 3) for single-wavelength optical signals in the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals having the same wavelength, select for outputting only one single-wavelength optical signal from one of the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals, and attenuate each selected single-wavelength optical signal; and 4) combine the attenuated, selected single-wavelength optical signals into a single primary output optical signal to be output to one of the spur terminators (460, 462). The type-1 light distributors (456 b, 458 b) of the type-5 spur add-ons (456, 458) can be configured to divide an optical signal from a spur terminator (460, 462) into first and second optical-power-divided optical signals, direct the first optical-power-divided optical signal to one of the ROADM core devices (452, 454), and direct the second optical-power-divided optical signal to the type-4 light distributor (456 c, 458 c). And the type-4 light distributors (456 c, 458 c) of the type-5 spur add-ons (456, 458) can be configured to: 1) separate the second optical-power-divided optical signal into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals; 2) change the intensity of at least one of the single-wavelength optical signals; and 3) assign each of the single-wavelength optical signals to any one of and only one of a plurality of different drop ports (456 e, 458 e) (denoted by “p Drop Ports” in FIG. 34) of the type-5 spur add-on (456, 458). It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the components of the type-5 spur add-ons (456, 458) (the type-4 light combiners (456 a, 458 a), the type-1 light distributors (4586 b, 458 b), and the type-4 light distributors (456 c, 458 c)) to be replaced with another suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the functions thereof.

FIG. 35 shows an example embodiment of how a type-4 ROADM core device can be used as a spur add-on within the spur main node. More specifically, FIG. 35 shows an optical spur 464 including a spur main node 466 and a spur end node 468. It should be understood, however, that it is within the scope of this example embodiment to use a type-4 ROADM core device in an optical spur different from the optical spur 464 shown in FIG. 35. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment for the optical spur to include other components not shown in FIG. 35. The spur main node includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 470, 472, and 474, and two spur add-ons, specifically two type-4 ROADM core devices 476 and 478. The spur end node 468 includes two type-1B spur terminators 480 and 482. The five type-4 ROADM core devices 470, 472, 474, 476, and 478, can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The two type-1B spur terminators 480 and 482 can be the same as, for example, the type-1B spur terminator 242 in FIG. 24, although they are not limited thereto. The type-4 ROADM core devices 476 and 478 functioning as the spur add-ons each include a type-2 light distributor (476 a, 478 a), a type-2 light combiner (476 b, 478 b), a type-4 light combiner (476 c, 478 c), and a type-1 light distributor (476 d, 478 d). The type-4 ROADM core devices 476 and 478 functioning as a spur add-on can be configured to: 1) divide, with the type-1 light distributor (476 d, 478 d), a multiple-wavelength optical signal received by the spur interface (476 e, 478 e) from the spur end node 468 into a plurality of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength output signals, one of which is output from the spur interface (476 f, 478 f) to a network node interface (472 a, 474 a) via one of the ROADM cores (472, 474), and another of which is separated into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals, which can be each output to a pre-assigned different colorless drop port (476 g, 478 g) (denoted as “Drops” in FIG. 35) with the type-2 light distributor (476 a, 478 a); 2) receive a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals each added from a different pre-assigned add port (476 h, 478 h) (denoted as “Adds” in FIG. 35) and combine the single-wavelength optical signals into a first multiple-wavelength optical signal with the type-2 light combiner (476 b, 478 b); 3) receive, with the type-4 light combiner (476 c, 478 c), the first multiple-wavelength optical signal and a second multiple-wavelength optical signal from one of the network node interfaces (472 a, 474 a) via one of the ROADM cores (472, 474); 4) separate, with the type-4 light combiner (476 c, 478 c), the first and second multiple-wavelength optical signals into a first plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the first multiple-wavelength signal and a second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals originating from the second multiple-wavelength optical signal; 5) for single-wavelength optical signals in the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals having the same wavelength, select for outputting only one single-wavelength optical signal from one of the first and second plurality of single-wavelength optical signals, with the type-4 light combiner (476 c, 478 c); 6) attenuate each selected single-wavelength optical signal, with the type-4 light combiner (476 c, 478 c); and 7) combine the attenuated, selected single-wavelength optical signals into a single primary output optical signal to be output from the spur interface (476 e, 478 e) to the spur end node 468, with the type-4 light combiner (476 c, 478 c).). It is within the scope of this an example embodiment for any of the components of the type-4 ROADM core devices (476, 478) (the type-2 light distributor (476 a, 478 a), the type-2 light combiner (476 b, 478 b), the type-4 light combiner (476 c, 478 c), and the type-1 light combiner (476 d, 478 d)) to be replaced with another suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

FIG. 36 shows an example embodiment of how a type-4 ROADM core device can be used as a spur add-on within the spur main node and also how a type-4 ROADM core device can be used within the spur end node. More specifically, FIG. 36 shows an optical spur 484 including a spur main node 486 and a spur end node 488. It is within the scope of this for the optical spur 484 to include components in addition to those shown in FIG. 36. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment to use type-4 ROADM core devices as spur add-ons and in spur end nodes of other types of optical spurs. The spur main node 486 can be the same as, for example, the spur main node 466 shown in FIG. 35, although it is not limited thereto. The spur main node 486 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 490, 492, and 494, and two spur add-ons, specifically two type-4 ROADM core devices 496 and 498. The spur end node 488 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices 500 and 502. The type-4 ROADM core devices 490, 492, 494, 496, 498, 500, and 502 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The type-4 ROADM core devices in the spur end node 488 (500, 502) include a type-1 light distributor (500 a, 502 a), a type-4 light combiner (500 b, 502 b), a type-2 light combiner (500 c, 502 c), and a type-2 light distributor (500 d, 502 d). The type-4 ROADM core devices 500 and 502 can be configured to: 1) combine single-wavelength optical signals of different wavelengths added thereto via colored add ports (500 e, 502 e) (denoted as “Adds” in FIG. 36) into a multiple-wavelength optical signal with the type-2 light combiner (500 c, 502 c); 2) separate the multiple-wavelength optical signal of different wavelengths into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals with the type-4 light combiner (500 b, 502 b); 3) individually attenuate each of the single-wavelength optical signals, combine each of the attenuated, single-wavelength optical signals into a combined multiple-wavelength optical signal and output the combined multiple-wavelength optical signal to the spur interface (496 a, 498 a) of the spur add-ons (496, 498) of the spur main node 486 with the type-4 light combiner (500 b, 502 b); 4) divide a multiple-wavelength optical signal received from the spur interface (496 a, 498 a) of the spur main node 486 into a plurality of optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength optical signals with the type-1 light distributor (500 a, 502 a); and 5) divide one of the optical-power-divided, multiple-wavelength output optical signals into a plurality of single-wavelength optical signals and output those signals from a plurality of colored drop ports (500 f, 502 f) (denoted by “Drops” in FIG. 36), using the type-2 light distributor (500 d, 502 d). It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the components of the type-4 ROADM core devices (500, 502) of the spur end node 488 (the type-1 light distributor (500 a, 502 a), the type-4 light combiner (500 b, 502 b), the type-2 light combiner (500 c, 502 c), and the type-2 light distributor (500 d, 502 d)) to be replaced with another suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

FIG. 37 shows an example embodiment of how amplifiers can be used to extend the length of the spur fibers associated with a spur. More specifically, FIG. 37 shows an optical spur 504 including a spur main node 506 and a spur end node 508. It is within the scope of this example embodiment for the optical spur 504 to include additional components not shown in FIG. 37. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment for amplifiers to be used to extend the length of the spur fiber associated with a spur, in an optical spur different from the optical spur 504, such as the optical spurs 260 (FIG. 26), 290 (FIG. 28), 316 (FIG. 29), 352 (FIG. 30), 388 (FIG. 32), 412 (FIG. 33), 444(FIG. 34), 464 (FIG. 35), and 484 (FIG. 36). The spur main node 506 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 510, 512, and 514, and two type-1B spur add-ons 516 and 518. The spur end node 508 includes two type-1B spur terminators 520 and 522. Optical amplifiers 524, 526, 528, and 530 amplify signals inputted into the spur add-ons 516 and 518 from the spur terminators 520 and 522 and amplify signals outputted from the spur add-ons 516 and 518 to the spur terminators 520 and 522. Optical amplifiers 532, 534, 536, and 538 amplify signals inputted into the spur terminators 520 and 522 from the spur add-ons 516 and 518 and amplify signals outputted from the spur terminators 520 and 522 to the spur add-ons 516 and 518. The three type-4 ROADM core devices 510, 512, and 514 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The two type-1B spur add-ons 516 and 518 can be the same as, for example, the type-1B spur add-on 220 in FIG. 22, although they are not limited thereto. The two type-1B spur terminators 520 and 522 can be the same as, for example, the type-1B spur terminator 242 in FIG. 24, although they are not limited thereto. Any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 510, 512, and 514, the type-1B spur add-ons 516 and 518, the type-1B spur terminators 520 and 522, and the optical amplifiers 524, 526, 528, 530, 532, 534, 536, and 538 can be replaced by another component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

FIG. 38 depicts an example embodiment of a 4^(th) generation DWDM networking element 539. The networking element 539 can constitute an entire optical node by itself or it can be a part of an optical node containing other components. The 4^(th) generation networking element 539 includes a ROADM core device 540 of any type that is capable of being connected 1) to various add-ons or add-on devices, which are denoted as add-ons 542, 544, and 546, and 2) one or more additional ROADMs and/or ROADM core devices having one or more network node interfaces enabling the networking element 539 to be connected to additional nodes (denoted by optical node degree 548). This capability of ROADM core device 540 is shown in FIG. 38 by connecting four devices thereto. But it should be understood that this example embodiment is not limited to a ROADM core device 540 of any type that is connected to four other add-ones and/or devices. It is within the scope of this example embodiment for the ROADM core device 540 to be connected to one, two, three, four, or more add-on devices and to be connected to one, two, three, four, or more ROADMs and/or ROADM core devices. Add-on 542 is a colored add/drop optical device or add-on. One example of a colored add/drop add-on is the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 shown in FIG. 13, although the colored add/drop add-on 542 is not limited thereto. Add-on 544 is a colorless add/drop device. One example of a colorless add/drop add-on is the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although the colorless add/drop add-on 544 is not limited thereto. Add-on 546 is an optical spur, which in this example embodiment is used to denote an entire optical spur or a portion of an optical spur, such as a spur add-on, a spur terminator, a wavelength blocker, or a simple coupler module, although the phrase “portion of an optical spur” and the term “add-on 546” are not limited thereto. Examples of optical spurs and/or portions of optical spurs are the spur add-ons 210 (FIG. 21), 220 (FIG. 22), 236 (FIG. 23), 242 (FIG. 24), 252 (FIG. 25), 300, 306 (FIG. 28) 328, 330 (FIG. 29), 364, 370 (FIG. 30), 380 (FIG. 31), 400, 402 (FIG. 32), 424, 426 (FIG. 33), 456, 458 (FIG. 34), 476, 478 (FIG. 35), and 500, 502 (FIG. 36), although it should be understood that the add-on 546 is not limited to these examples. And although FIG. 38 shows one colored add-on, one colorless add-on, one optical spur add-on, and one additional ROADM (denoted by the component 548 labeled “optical node degree”), it is within the scope of this example embodiment to couple the ROADM core device 540 to more than one colored add-on, more than one colorless add-on, more than one optical spur, and more than one other ROADM core device. The dashed lines around ROADM core device 540 and colored add-on 542 indicate that the colored add-on 542 can be internally coupled to the ROADM core device 540 by being located inside the ROADM core device 540. One example of this configuration is shown in FIG. 16, although it should be understood that the networking element 539 is not limited to this example. It should also be understood that it is within the scope of this example embodiment, to externally couple a colored add-on to the ROADM core device 540. The ROADM core device 540 can be the same as, for example, the ROADM 10 (FIG. 1), the ROADM core device 102 (FIG. 8), the ROADM core devices 108, 110 (FIG. 9), the ROADM core devices 122, 124 (FIG. 10), the ROADM core devices 128, 130 (FIG. 11), the ROADM core device 132 (FIG. 12), the ROADM core device 140 (FIG. 13), the ROADM core device 164 (FIG. 16), the ROADM core device 168 (FIG. 17), or the ROADM core device 174 (FIG. 18), although it is not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment for the 4^(th) generation DWDM networking element 539 to include components in addition to those shown in FIG. 38, such as one or more input and output amplifiers and one or more optical converters. It should be noted that using the techniques described herein, all add-ons can be added without affecting existing traffic through the DWDM networking element 539 and through a multifunctional reconfigurable DWDM optical node of which the 4^(th) generation DWDM networking element 539 may be a part.

FIG. 39, like FIG. 36, shows an example embodiment in which the spur main node and the spur end node are composed of type-4 ROADM core devices. The difference is that in FIG. 39, each spur add-on is connected to two of the ROADM core devices (the FIG. 36 example embodiment shows only one spur add-on (496) connected to two ROADM core devices (490, 492)). Thus, FIG. 39 shows an optical spur 550 including a spur main node 552 and a spur end node 554. The spur main node includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 556, 558, and 560, and two spur add-ons, specifically two type-4 ROADM core devices 562 and 564. The spur end node 554 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices 566 and 568. Spur add-on 562 is connected to both ROADM core devices 556 and 558, while spur add-on 564 is connected to both ROADM core devices 556 and 560. The optical spur 550 can be the same as, for example, the optical spur 484 shown in FIG. 36 (except that both spur add-ons 562 and 564 are connected to two type-4 ROADM core devices), although it is not limited thereto. Therefore, the type-4 ROADM core devices 556, 558, 560, 562, 564, 566, and 568 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. In addition, it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the optical spur 550 to include components in addition to those shown in FIG. 39. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 556, 558, 560, 562, 564, 566, and 568 to be replaced with another suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

FIG. 40 shows an example of an embodiment having two spur end nodes and in which two spur add-ons are connected to each ROADM core device. Thus, FIG. 40 shows an optical spur 570 including a spur main node 572 and spur end nodes 574 and 576. The spur main node 572 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices, west ROADM core device 578 and east ROADM core device 580, and two pairs of spur add-ons. One pair of spur add-ons, west spur add-on #1 (582) and west spur add-on #2 (584), is connected to the west ROADM core device 578 and the other pair of spur add-ons, east spur add-on #1 (586) and east spur add-on #2 (588), is connected to the ROADM core device 580. The spur end node #1 includes west spur terminator #1 (590) and east spur terminator #1 (592), while the spur end node #2 includes west spur terminator #2 (594) and east spur terminator #2 (596). The west spur terminators #1 and #2 (590 and 594) are connected to the west spur add-ons #1 (582) and #2 (584), respectively. The east spur terminators #1 and #2 (592 and 596) are connected to the east spur add-ons #1 (586) and #2 (588), respectively. It is within the scope of the this example embodiment for the optical spur 570 to include components in addition to those shown in FIG. 40. The type-4 ROADM core devices 578 and 580 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core devices 164, 168, 174, 182, 184, 186, and 188 shown in FIGS. 16-19, although they are not limited thereto. The spur add-ons 582, 584, 586, and 588 each include a type-1B spur add-on, while the spur terminators 590, 592, 594, and 596 each include a type-1B spur terminator. The spur add-ons 582, 584, 586, and 588 can be the same, for example, the type-1B spur add-on 220 shown in FIG. 22, although they are not limited thereto. The spur terminators 590, 592, 594, and 596 can be the same as, for example, the type-TB spur terminator 242 shown in FIG. 24, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 578 and 580, the type-TB spur add-ons 582, 584, 586, and 588, and the type-1B spur terminators 590, 592, 594, and 596 to be replaced with other suitable component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

Additional Example Embodiments

FIGS. 41-58, and 59A-59H illustrate additional example embodiments of the invention.

FIG. 41 shows a network element 598 including a ROADM core device of any type 600 connected to two different types ROADM add-ons 602 and 604 (denoted as type x and type y in the drawings) through two pairs of subtending inputs and outputs. The ROADM core device 600 has a network node interface 600 a through which the ROADM core device 600 communicates with another node and k subtending inputs and outputs, where k is at least 2, providing the at least two pairs of subtending inputs and outputs for connection to the two ROADM add-ons 602 and 604. The x type of ROADM add-on 602 has i pairs of subtending inputs and outputs and the y type of ROADM add-on 604 has j pairs of subtending inputs and outputs. The number of subtending inputs and outputs of the ROADM add-ons and of the ROADM core device, i, j, and k, may be the same or different from each other. The ROADM core device 600 may be the same as, for example, the ROADM 10 (FIG. 1), the ROADM core device 102 (FIG. 8), the ROADM core devices 108, 110 (FIG. 9), the ROADM core devices 122, 124 (FIG. 10), the ROADM core devices 128, 130 (FIG. 11), the ROADM core device 132 (FIG. 12), the ROADM core device 140 (FIG. 13), the ROADM core device 164 (FIG. 16), the ROADM core device 168 (FIG. 17), or the ROADM core device 174 (FIG. 18), although it is not limited thereto. The ROADM add-ons 602 and 604 may be the same as, for example, the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 42 shows a network element 606 including two interconnected ROADM core devices of any type 608 and 610, where ROADM core device 608 is also connected to two different types of ROADM add-ons 612 and 614 (denoted as type x and type y in the drawings) through two pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. Each ROADM core device has a network node interface (608 a, 610 a) through which the network element 606 communicates with another node, and a result, the network element 606 is a two-degree optical node. Each ROADM core device also has k subtending inputs and outputs, where k can be the same or different for each ROADM core device. The x type of ROADM add-on 612 has i pairs of subtending inputs and outputs and the y type of ROADM add-on 614 has j pairs of subtending inputs and outputs. The number of subtending inputs and outputs of the ROADM add-ons and of the ROADM core device, i, j, and k, may be the same or different from each other. The ROADM core devices 608 and 610 may be the same as, for example, the ROADM 10 shown in FIG. 1, the ROADM core device 102 (FIG. 8), the ROADM core devices 108, 110 (FIG. 9), the ROADM core devices 122, 124 (FIG. 10), the ROADM core devices 128, 130 (FIG. 11), the ROADM core device 132 (FIG. 12), the ROADM core device 140 (FIG. 13), the ROADM core device 164 (FIG. 16), the ROADM core device 168 (FIG. 17), or the ROADM core device 174 (FIG. 18), although they are not limited thereto. The ROADM add-ons 612 and 614 may be the same as, for example, the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 43 shows a network element 616 including a type-3 ROADM core device 618 connected to two ROADM add-ons through two pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. The two ROADM add-ons include a type-1 ROADM core 620, which functions as a colorless optical add/drop device, and a ROADM add-on 622 of any type (denoted as type y in the FIG. 43). The ROADM core device 618 has a network node interface 618 a through which the ROADM core device communicates with another node. The ROADM add-on 620 has k pairs of subtending inputs and outputs and the y type of ROADM add-on 622 has j pairs of subtending inputs and outputs. The number of subtending inputs and outputs of the ROADM add-ons and of the ROADM core device may be the same or different from each other. Thus, k for the ROADM core device 618, k for the ROADM add-on 620, and j for the ROADM add-on 622 may be the same or different from each other. The ROADM core device 618 may be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 132 shown in FIG. 12, although it is not limited thereto. The ROADM add-on 620 may be the same as, for example, the ROADM add-on 162 shown in FIG. 15. The add-on 622 may be the same as, for example, one of the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although it is not limited thereto.

FIG. 44 shows a network element 624 including a type-3 ROADM core device 626 connected to two ROADM add-ons through two pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. The two ROADM add-ons include a type-1 ROADM core 628, which functions as a colorless optical add/drop device, and another ROADM add-on 630 of any type (denoted as type y in FIG. 44). The type-1 ROADM core 628 includes an optical amplifier 628 a at the primary input to the type-4 light distributor 628 b and an optical amplifier 628 c at the primary output of the type-1 light combiner 628 d. The type-3 ROADM core device 626 has a network node interface 626 a through which the type-3 ROADM core device 626 communicates with another node. The ROADM add-on 628 has k pairs of subtending inputs and outputs and the y type of ROADM add-on 630 has j pairs of subtending inputs and outputs. The number of subtending inputs and outputs of the ROADM add-ons and of the ROADM core device may be the same or different from each other. Thus, k for the ROADM core device 626, k for the ROADM add-on 628, and j for the ROADM add-on 630 may be the same or different from each other. The type-3 ROADM core device 626 may be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 132 shown in FIG. 12, although it is not limited thereto. The type-1 ROADM core device 628 may be the same as, for example, the ROADM core device 176 shown in FIG. 18, although it is not limited thereto. The ROADM add-on 630 may be the same as, for example, one of the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although it is not limited thereto.

FIG. 45 shows a network element 632 including a type-3 ROADM core device 634 connected to two ROADM add-ons through two pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. The type-3 ROADM core device 634 also has a network node interface 634 a through which it communicates with another node. The ROADM add-ons include a type-1 ROADM core 636, which functions as a colorless optical add/drop device, and a type-1 ROADM add-on 638, which functions as a colored optical add/drop device. The number of pairs of subtending inputs and outputs of the ROADM core device 634, and of the ROADM add-ons 636 and 638 may be the same or different from each other. The type-3 ROADM core device 634 may be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 132 shown in FIG. 12, although it is not limited thereto. The type-1 ROADM core 636 may be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 102 shown in FIG. 8, the type-1 ROADM core devices 108, 110 shown in FIG. 9, and the type-1 ROADM core devices 122, 124 shown in FIG. 10, although it is not limited thereto. The type-1 ROADM add-on 638 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 shown in FIG. 13.

FIG. 46 shows a network element 640 including a type-4 ROADM core device 642 connected internally to a type-1 ROADM add-on (including a type-2 light distributor 642 a and a type-2 light combiner 642 b), and externally to another ROADM add-on 644 of any type (denoted in FIG. 46 as type x), through two pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. The type-4 ROADM core device 642 has a network node interface 642 c. The ROADM add-on 644 has i subtending inputs and outputs. The number of subtending inputs and outputs i of the ROADM add-on 644, is the same as or different from the number of subtending inputs and outputs k for the ROADM core device 642. The type-4 ROADM core device 642 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although it is not limited thereto. The ROADM add-on 644 may be the same as, for example, one of the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although it is not limited thereto.

FIG. 47 shows a network element 646 including a four-degree node including four type-3 ROADM core devices (648, 650, 652, and 654), each having a network node interface (648 a, 650 a, 652 a, and 654 a) enabling communication with another node. Each type-3 ROADM core device (648, 650, 652, and 654) is connected to the other type-3 ROADM core devices and to two different kinds of ROADM add-ons ((648 b, 648 c), (650 b, 650 c), (652 b, 652 c), (654 b, 654 c)) (denoted in FIG. 47 as type x and type y) through five pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. Each of the ROADM add-ons ((648 b, 648 c), (650 b, 650 c), (652 b, 652 c), (654 b, 654 c)) can have the same number or a different number of subtending inputs and outputs from the other ROADM add-ons and from the four type-3 ROADM core devices (648, 650, 652, and 654). The type-3 ROADM core devices 648, 650, 652, and 654 can be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 132 shown in FIG. 12, although they are not limited thereto. Each of the x- and y-type ROADM add-ons ((648 b, 648 c), (650 b, 650 c), (652 b, 652 c), (654 b, 654 c)) may be the same as, for example, one of the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto. Although FIG. 47 shows that the add-ons connected to each ROADM core device are different from each other, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the add-ons within each pair to be the same type of add-on.

FIG. 48 shows an optical network 656 including a first node 658, a second node 660, and a third node 662. Nodes 658 and 660 are two-degree nodes, each having two network node interfaces (658 a, 658 b, 660 a, 660 b), through each of which these nodes connect to one of the other nodes. Nodes 658 and 660 each include two type-3 ROADM core devices (658 c, 658 d, 660 c, 660 d), each of which includes one of the network node interfaces (658 a, 658 b, 660 a, 660 b). Each type-3 ROADM core device (658 c, 658 d, 660 c, 660 d) is connected to two different kinds of ROADM add-ons (ROADM core device 658 c is connected to add-ons (658 e, 658 f), ROADM core device 658 d is connected to add-ons (658 g, 658 h), ROADM core device 660 c is connected to add-ons (660 e, 660 f), and ROADM core device 660 d is connected to add-ons (660 g, 660 h) (the add-ons in FIG. 48 are denoted as type x and type y add-ons). Each type-3 ROADM core device (658 c, 658 d, 660 c, 660 d) is also connected to the other type-3 ROADM core device within its node through a pair of its k subtending inputs and outputs. Node 662 is a three-degree node including three type-3 ROADM core devices (662 a, 662 b, 662 c), each including a network node interface (662 d, 662 e, 662 f) and each connected to two different kinds of ROADM add-ons (662 g, 662 h, 662 i, 662 j, 662 k, and 662 l) (denoted as type x and type y) and to the other two type-3 ROADM core devices within node 662 through four pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. The type-3 ROADM core devices 658 c, 658 d, 660 c, 660 d, 662 a, 662 b, and 662 c can be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 132 shown in FIG. 12, although they are not limited thereto. Each of the add-ons 658 e, 658 f, 658 g, 658 h, 660 e, 660 f, 660 g, 660 h, 662 g, 662 h, 662 i, 662 j, 662 k, and 662 l, may be the same as, for example, one of the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto. Although FIG. 48 shows that the add-ons connected to each ROADM core device are different from each other, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the add-ons within each pair to be the same type of add-on.

FIG. 49 shows a network element 664 including a two-degree node including two ROADM core devices (666, 668) of any type, each having a network node interface (666 a, 668 a), enabling connection to another node. Each ROADM core device is connected to the other ROADM core device and to a different type of ROADM add-on 670, 672 through two pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. The ROADM add-on 670 has i subtending inputs and outputs, the ROADM add-on 672 has j subtending inputs and outputs, and i, j, k, and k (respectively representing the total number of subtending inputs and outputs for the ROADM add-on 670, the ROADM add-on 672, the ROADM core device 666, and the ROADM core device 668) are the same or different from each other. The ROADM core devices 666 and 668 may be the same as, for example, the ROADM 10 (FIG. 1), the ROADM core device 102 (FIG. 8), the ROADM core devices 108, 110 (FIG. 9), the ROADM core devices 122, 124 (FIG. 10), the ROADM core devices 128, 130 (FIG. 11), the ROADM core device 132 (FIG. 12), the ROADM core device 140 (FIG. 13), the ROADM core device 164 (FIG. 16), the ROADM core device 168 (FIG. 17), or the ROADM core device 174 (FIG. 18), although they are not limited thereto. Each of the ROADM add-ons 670 and 672 may be the same as, for example, the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto. Although FIG. 49 shows that the add-ons are different from each other, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the add-ons to be the same type of add-on.

FIG. 50 shows a network element 674 including a two-degree node including two ROADM core devices (676, 678) of any type, each having a network node interface (676 a, 678 a), enabling communication with another node. Each ROADM core device is connected to the other ROADM core device and to two different types of ROADM add-ons through three pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. More specifically, ROADM add-ons 680 and 682 are different types of ROADM add-ons from each other (denoted in FIG. 50 as type x and type y) and are connected to ROADM core device 676, and ROADM add-ons 684 and 686 are different types of ROADM add-ons from each other (denoted as type x and type y) that are connected to ROADM core device 678. The number of subtending inputs and outputs on the ROADM add-ons 680, 682, 684, and 686 and the ROADM core devices 676 and 678 may be the same or different from each other. The ROADM core devices 676 and 678 may be the same as, for example, the ROADM 10 (FIG. 1), the ROADM core device 102 (FIG. 8), the ROADM core devices 108, 110 (FIG. 9), the ROADM core devices 122, 124 (FIG. 10), the ROADM core devices 128, 130 (FIG. 11), the ROADM core device 132 (FIG. 12), the ROADM core device 140 (FIG. 13), the ROADM core device 164 (FIG. 16), the ROADM core device 168 (FIG. 17), or the ROADM core device 174 (FIG. 18), although they are not limited thereto. Each of the ROADM add-ons 680, 682, 684, and 686 may be the same as, for example, the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto. Although FIG. 50 shows that the add-ons connected to each ROADM core device are different from each other, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the add-ons within each pair to be the same type of add-on.

FIG. 51 shows a network element 688 including a two-degree node including two type-3 ROADM core devices (690,692), each having a network node interface (690 a, 692 a), enabling communication with another node. Each ROADM core device is connected to the other ROADM core device and to two different types of ROADM add-ons through three pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. More specifically, ROADM add-ons 694 and 696 are different types of ROADM add-ons from each other (denoted in FIG. 51 as type x and type y) and are connected to ROADM core device 690, and ROADM add-ons 698 and 700 are different types of ROADM add-ons from each other (denoted in FIG. 51 as type x and type y) that are connected to ROADM core device 692. The number of subtending inputs and outputs on the ROADM add-ons 694, 696, 698, and 700 the ROADM core devices 690 and 692 may be the same or different from each other. The type-3 ROADM core devices 690 and 692 can be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 140 shown in FIG. 13, although they are not limited thereto. The add-ons 694, 696, 698, and 700 may be the same as, for example, the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto. Although FIG. 51 shows that the add-ons connected to each ROADM core device are different from each other, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the add-ons within each pair to be the same type of add-on.

FIG. 52 shows a network element 702 including a two-degree node including two type-3 ROADM core devices (704, 706), each having a network node interface (704 a, 706 a), enabling communication with another node. Each ROADM core device is connected to the other ROADM core device and to colored and colorless types of ROADM add-ons through three pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. More specifically, ROADM add-ons 708 and 710 are colorless and colored optical add/drop add-ons, respectively, and are connected to ROADM core device 704, and ROADM add-ons 712 and 714 are colorless and colored optical add/drop add-ons, respectively, that are connected to ROADM core device 706. The ROADM add-ons 708, 710, 712, and 714 and the ROADM core devices 704 and 706 may have the same or a different number of subtending inputs and outputs from each other. The type-3 ROADM core devices 704 and 706 can be the same as, for example, the type-3 ROADM core device 140 shown in FIG. 13, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless add-ons 708 and 712 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto. The colored add-ons 710 and 714 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM add-on 142 shown in FIG. 13, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 53 shows a network element 716 including a two-degree node including a type-4 west ROADM core device 718 and a type-4 east ROADM core device 720, each having a network node interface (718 a and 720 a, respectively) enabling communication with another node. Each type-4 ROADM core device in this example embodiment is connected to the other type-4 ROADM core device, is connected internally to a type-1 ROADM add-on, and is connected externally to a different type of ROADM add-on from the other ROADM core device (the two types of add-ons 722 and 724 are denoted in FIG. 53 as type x and type y add-ons) through three pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. Thus, ROADM add-on 722 is connected to the type-4 west ROADM core device 718 and the ROADM add-on 724 is connected to the type-4 east ROADM core device 720. The ROADM add-ons 722 and 724 and the ROADM core devices 718 and 720 have the same or a different number of subtending inputs and outputs from each other. The type-4 ROADM core devices 718 and 720 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The add-ons 722 and 724 can be the same as, for example, the add-ons 542, 544, 546, or 548 shown in FIG. 38, although they are not limited thereto. Although FIG. 53 shows that the add-ons are different from each other, it is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the add-ons to be the same type of add-on.

FIG. 54 shows a network element 726 including a two-degree node including a type-4 west ROADM core device 728 and a type-4 east ROADM core device 730, each having a network node interface (728 a and 730 a, respectively) enabling communication with another node. Each type-4 ROADM core device in this example embodiment is connected to the other type-4 ROADM core device, is connected internally to a type-1 ROADM add-on, and is connected externally to a colorless optical add/drop add-on through three pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. Thus, ROADM add-on 732 is connected to the type-4 west ROADM core device 728 and the ROADM add-on 734 is connected to the type-4 east ROADM core device 730. The ROADM add-ons 732 and 734 and the ROADM core devices 728 and 730 have the same or a different number of subtending inputs and outputs from each other. Add-ons 732 and 734 are colorless optical add/drop devices. The type-4 ROADM core devices 728 and 730 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. Colorless Add-ons 732 and 734 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 55 shows a network element 736 including a two-degree node including a type-4 west ROADM core device 738 and a type-4 east ROADM core device 740, each having a network node interface (738 a, 740 a, respectively) enabling communication with another node. Each type-4 ROADM core device in this example embodiment is connected to the other type-4 ROADM core device, is connected internally to a type-1 ROADM add-on, and is connected externally to a colorless optical add/drop add-on (one of ROADM add-ons 742 and 744) through three pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. The ROADM add-on 742 is connected to the type-4 west ROADM core device 738 and the ROADM add-on 744 is connected to the type-4 east ROADM core device 740. The ROADM add-ons 742 and 744 and the ROADM core devices 738 and 740 have the same or a different number of subtending inputs and outputs from each other. Colorless optical add/drop add-ons 742 and 744 each include a type-1 ROADM core device, such as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto. The type-4 ROADM core devices 738 and 740 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 56 shows one way to connect a type-4 ROADM core device to a type-1 ROADM core device functioning as a colorless optical add/drop ROADM add-on in another example embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 56 shows a network element 746 including a two-degree node including a type-4 west ROADM core device 748 and a type-4 east ROADM core device 750, each having a network node interface (748 a, 750 a, respectively) enabling communication with another node. Each type-4 ROADM core device in this example embodiment is connected to the other type-4 ROADM core device, is connected internally to a type-1 ROADM add-on, and is connected externally to a type-1 ROADM core device (functioning as a colorless optical add/drop add-on) through three pairs of its k subtending inputs and outputs. More specifically, the ROADM add-on 752 is connected to the type-4 west ROADM core device 748 and the ROADM add-on 754 is connected to the type-4 east ROADM core device 750. The ROADM add-ons 752 and 754 and the ROADM core devices 748 and 750 have the same or a different number of subtending inputs and outputs from each other. In this example embodiment, the primary output 752 a of the type-1 ROADM core device 752, which is the output of the type-1 light combiner 752 b, is connected to one of the subtending inputs 748 b of the type-4 light combiner 748 c of the type-4 west ROADM core device 748, while one of the subtending outputs 748 d of the type-1 light distributor 748 e of the type-4 west ROADM core device 748 is connected to the primary input 752 c of the type-1 ROADM core 752, which is connected to the input of the type-4 light distributor 752 d. The east ROADM core device 750 is connected to the type-1 ROADM core device 754 in the same manner, although it is not limited to this type of connection. The type-4 ROADM core devices 748 and 750 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1 ROADM core devices 752 and 754 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 57 shows another example of an embodiment of an optical spur. It is similar to FIG. 26, except that it uses type-1A spur add-ons and type-1A spur terminators. Accordingly, FIG. 57 shows an optical spur 756 that can include a spur main node 758 and a spur end node 760. The spur main node 758 can include a type-4 west ROADM core device 762, a type-4 east ROADM core device 764, a type-1A west spur add-on 766 and a type-1B east spur add-on 768. The west ROADM core device 762 is connected to the west spur add-on 766 and the east ROADM core device 764 is connected to the east spur add-on 768. The spur end node 760 includes a type-1A west spur terminator 770 and a type-1B east spur terminator 772. The west spur terminator 770 is connected to the west spur add-on 766, while the east spur terminator 772 is connected to the east spur add-on 768, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment, to connect the west spur terminator 770 to the east spur add-on 768 and to connect the east spur terminator 772 to the west spur add-on 766. The type-4 ROADM core devices 762 and 764 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1A and type-TB spur add-ons 766 and 768 can be the same as, for example, the type-1A spur add-on 210 shown in FIG. 21 and the type-1B spur add-on 220 shown in FIG. 22, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1A and 1B spur terminators 770 and 772 can be the same as, for example, the type-1A spur terminator 236 shown in FIG. 23 and the type-1B spur terminator 242 shown in FIG. 24, although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for the optical node 756 to include components in addition to those shown in FIG. 57. In addition, it is within the scope of this example embodiment for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 762, 764, the type-1A and type-TB spur add-ons 766 and 768, and the type-1A and type-TB spur terminators 770 and 772 to be replaced with another component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

FIG. 58 illustrates an optical network 774 including a first optical node 776, a second optical node 778, and a third optical node 780. Nodes 776 and 778 are two-degree nodes, each having two network node interfaces, (776 a, 776 b) and (778 a, 778 b) respectively, through each of which these nodes connect to one of the other nodes. Nodes 776 and 778 each include two type-4 ROADM core devices (776 c, 776 d), (778 c, 778 d), each of which includes one of the network node interfaces. Each type-4 ROADM core device in one of the nodes 776, 778 is connected to a colorless optical add/drop device (776 e, 776 f), (778 e, 778 f) and to the other type-4 ROADM core device in that node through two pairs of its k external subtending inputs and outputs. Node 782 is a two-degree node including a spur main node. Node 784 is a spur end node. The spur main node 782 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices 782 a, 782 b, each including a network node interface 782 c, 782 d, and two type-1B spur add-ons 782 e, 782 f. The spur end node 784 includes two type-1B spur terminators 784 a, 784 b. The type-4 ROADM core devices 776 c, 776 d, 778 c, 778 d, 782 a, and 782 b can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless optical add/drop devices 776 e, 776 f, 778 e, and 778 f can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto. The type-1B spur add-ons 782 e and 782 f can be the same as, for example, the type-1B spur add-on 220 shown in FIG. 22 although they are not limited thereto. The type-1B spur terminators 784 a, 784 b can be the same as, for example, the type-1B spur terminator 242 shown in FIG. 24 although they are not limited thereto. It is within the scope of this example embodiment, for any of the type-4 ROADM core devices 776 c, 776 d, 778 c, 778 d, 782 a, the colorless optical add/drop devices 776 e, 776 f, 778 e, and 778 f, the type-TB spur add-ons 782 e and 782 f, and the type-1B spur terminators 784 a, 784 b to be replaced with another component (or components) that performs (or perform) the same functions thereof.

FIGS. 59A through 59H show elements of a spur main node of an optical spur including a spur main node and a spur end node. In addition, these figures show a specific type of spur main node, i.e., one that includes type-4 ROADM core devices with three pairs of external subtending inputs and outputs (i.e., k=3, where k is the total number of pairs of subtending inputs and outputs). However, it is within the scope of these example embodiments to include type-4 ROADM core devices that have more than three pairs of external subtending inputs and outputs. The type-4 ROADM core devices are connected to add-on devices whose number of subtending inputs and outputs is the same as or different from each other and is the same as or different from the number of pairs of external subtending inputs and outputs of the type-4 ROADM core devices.

FIG. 59A illustrates a network element 786 including a two-degree optical node having two network node interfaces. The network element 786 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices 788 and 790 each having a network node interface 788 a, 790 a, and each of which is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the other type-4 ROADM core device, to a colorless optical add/drop device 792 or 796, and to a spur add-on 794 or 798. The type-4 ROADM core devices 788 and 790 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless optical add-drop devices 792 and 796 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto. Each of the spur add-ons 794 and 798 can be the same as, for example, any of the spur add-ons 210 (FIG. 21), 220 (FIG. 22), 236 (FIG. 23), 242 (FIG. 24), 252 (FIG. 25), 300, 306 (FIG. 28) 328, 330 (FIG. 29), 364, 370 (FIG. 30), 380 (FIG. 31), 400, 402 (FIG. 32), 424, 426 (FIG. 33), 456, 458 (FIG. 34), 476, 478 (FIG. 35), and 500, 502 (FIG. 36), although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 59B illustrates a network element 800 including a three-degree optical node having three network node interfaces. The network element 800 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 802, 804, and 806, each having a network node interface 802 a, 804 a, 806 a, respectively, and each of which is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the two other type-4 ROADM core devices, and to a colorless optical add/drop device 808, 810, or 812. The type-4 ROADM core devices 802 and 804 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless optical add-drop devices 808, 810, and 812 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 59C illustrates a network element 814 including a three-degree optical node having three network node interfaces. The network element 814 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 816, 818, and 820, each having a network node interface 816 a, 818 a, and 820 a, respectively, and each of which is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the two other type-4 ROADM core devices and to an add-on device. More specifically, ROADM core devices 816 and 818 are each connected to a colorless optical add/drop add-on 822 or 824. ROADM core device 820 is connected to spur add-on 826. The type-4 ROADM core devices 816 and 818 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless optical add-drop devices 822 and 824 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto. The spur add-on 826 can be the same as, for example, any of the spur add-ons 210 (FIG. 21), 220 (FIG. 22), 236 (FIG. 23), 242 (FIG. 24), 252 (FIG. 25), 300, 306 (FIG. 28) 328, 330 (FIG. 29), 364, 370 (FIG. 30), 380 (FIG. 31), 400, 402 (FIG. 32), 424, 426 (FIG. 33), 456, 458 (FIG. 34), 476, 478 (FIG. 35), and 500, 502 (FIG. 36), although it is not limited thereto.

FIG. 59D illustrates a network element 828 including a three-degree optical node having three network node interfaces. The network element 828 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 830, 832, and 834, each having a network node interface 830 a, 832, and 834 a, respectively. Each ROADM core device is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the two other type-4 ROADM core devices and to an add-on device. More specifically, the ROADM core devices 830 and 834 are connected to spur add-ons 836 and 840, respectively, and the ROADM core device 832 is connected to a colorless optical add/drop device 838. The type-4 ROADM core devices 830, 832, and 834 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless optical add-drop device 838 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto. Each of the spur add-ons 836 and 840 can be the same as, for example, any of the spur add-ons 210 (FIG. 21), 220 (FIG. 22), 236 (FIG. 23), 242 (FIG. 24), 252 (FIG. 25), 300, 306 (FIG. 28) 328, 330 (FIG. 29), 364, 370 (FIG. 30), 380 (FIG. 31), 400, 402 (FIG. 32), 424, 426 (FIG. 33), 456, 458 (FIG. 34), 476, 478 (FIG. 35), and 500, 502 (FIG. 36), although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 59E illustrates a network element 842 including a three-degree optical node having three network node interfaces. The network element 842 includes three type-4 ROADM core devices 844, 846, and 848, each having a network node interface 844 a, 846 a, and 848 a, respectively, and each of which is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the two other type-4 ROADM core devices, and to one of the spur add-ons 850, 852, and 854. The type-4 ROADM core devices 844, 846, and 848 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. Each of the spur add-ons 850, 852, and 854 can be the same as, for example, any of the spur add-ons 210 (FIG. 21), 220 (FIG. 22), 236 (FIG. 23), 242 (FIG. 24), 252 (FIG. 25), 300, 306 (FIG. 28) 328, 330 (FIG. 29), 364, 370 (FIG. 30), 380 (FIG. 31), 400, 402 (FIG. 32), 424, 426 (FIG. 33), 456, 458 (FIG. 34), 476, 478 (FIG. 35), and 500, 502 (FIG. 36), although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 59F illustrates a network element 856 including a two-degree optical node having two network node interfaces. The network element 856 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices 858 and 860 each having a network node interface 858 a and 860 a, respectively, and each of which is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the other type-4 ROADM core device and to two add-ons. Thus, the type-4 ROADM core device 858 is connected to the two colorless optical add/drop add-ons 862 and 864, and the type-4 ROADM core device 860 is connected to a colorless optical add/drop device 866 and a spur add-on 868. The type-4 ROADM core devices 858 and 860 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless optical add-drop devices 862, 864, and 866 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto. The spur add-on 868 can be the same as, for example, any of the spur add-ons 210 (FIG. 21), 220 (FIG. 22), 252 (FIG. 25), 328, 330 (FIG. 29), 366, 368, 372, 374 (FIG. 30), 380 (FIG. 31), 400, 402 (FIG. 32), 424, 426 (FIG. 33), 456, 458 (FIG. 34), 476, 478 (FIG. 35), and 496, 498 (FIG. 36), although it is not limited thereto.

FIG. 59G illustrates a network element 870 including a two-degree optical node having two network node interfaces. The network element 870 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices 872 and 874 each having a network node interface, 872 a and 874 a, respectively, and each of which is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the other type-4 ROADM core device, and to two colorless optical add/drop add-ons. More specifically, the ROADM core device 872 is connected to colorless optical add/drop add-ons 876 and 878 and the ROADM core device 874 is connected to colorless optical add/drop add-ons 880 and 882. The type-4 ROADM core devices 872 and 874 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. The colorless optical add-drop devices 876, 878, 880, and 882 can be the same as, for example, the type-1 ROADM core device 162 shown in FIG. 15, although they are not limited thereto.

FIG. 59H illustrates a network element 884 including a two-degree optical node having two network node interfaces. The network element 884 includes two type-4 ROADM core devices 886 and 888 each having a network node interface, 886 a and 888 a, respectively, and each of which is connected through three of its k subtending inputs and outputs to the other type-4 ROADM core device, and to two spur add-ons. More specifically, the ROADM core device 886 is connected to spur add-ons 890 and 892 and the ROADM core device 888 is connected to spur add-ons 894 and 896. The type-4 ROADM core devices 886 and 888 can be the same as, for example, the type-4 ROADM core device 164 shown in FIG. 16, although they are not limited thereto. Each of the spur add-ons 890, 892, 894, and 896 can be the same as, for example, any of the spur add-ons 210 (FIG. 21), 220 (FIG. 22), 252 (FIG. 25), 328, 330 (FIG. 29), 366, 368, 372, 374 (FIG. 30), 380 (FIG. 31), 400, 402 (FIG. 32), 424, 426 (FIG. 33), 456, 458 (FIG. 34), 476, 478 (FIG. 35), and 496, 498 (FIG. 36), although they are not limited thereto.

Apparatus and Procedure for Reducing the Optical Power of Four Wave Mixing Cross Products

ROADMs can be configured to suppress and/or otherwise mitigate against FWM (four wave mixing) cross products that either exist or otherwise may be generated in the network of which the ROADMs are a part. More specifically, ROADMs can be configured to suppress and/or otherwise mitigate against the generation of FWM cross products in fiber optic cable, such as Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber (NZDSF) or Dispersion Shifted Fiber (DSF), as a result of the transmission from the ROADM of a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths. In addition ROADMs that can pass through one or more optical signals, for example by way of at least one express in port or an add port that functions as an express in port, can be configured to suppress and/or otherwise mitigate against FWM cross products that either exist or otherwise may be generated in the network of which the ROADMs are a part. The following discussion of various example embodiments of ways to configure ROADMs to suppress FWM is provided to illustrate the applicability of these example embodiments to third or fourth generation ROADMs, including, but not limited to, the example ROADMs shown in FIGS. 8-20, 26, 28-30, 32-58, and 59A-59H. The procedures discussed below to configure ROADMs to suppress FWM are also applicable to an optical element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same and/or similar function as a ROADM. In addition, in the following discussion of various example ways to suppress FWM in a ROADM, the optical signals of different wavelengths will be discussed, since ROADMs support optical signals of a predetermined number of wavelengths. In each example embodiment discussed below and in each example embodiment discussed with respect to Tables 1-6 and FIGS. 60-69, the wavelengths of the different optical signals input into and output from the various ROADMs can be collectively represented by an input set of monotonically increasing wavelength values and an output set of monotonically increasing wavelength values, respectively, the wavelength values in each set including alternating even numbered and odd numbered members of increasing wavelength values. Also, any two consecutive wavelength values in the input and output sets of wavelength values are denoted as adjacent or consecutive wavelength values. Further, input optical signals whose wavelength values are adjacent wavelength values are denoted as adjacent input optical signals, and output optical signals whose wavelength values are adjacent wavelength values are denoted as adjacent or consecutive output optical signals. In addition, any two add ports of a ROADM at which optical signals of adjacent wavelength values are input, are denoted as adjacent add ports. Moreover, the add ports of a ROADM into which optical signals are not input are denoted as inactive add ports, while the add ports into which the optical signals are input are denoted as active add ports.

In one example embodiment, the power of the FWM cross products can be reduced by widening the channel spacing (i.e., increasing the wavelength spacing between adjacent wavelengths) so that optical signals outputted from a ROADM to a network have a wider channel spacing, which leads to a larger dispersion difference and therefore leads to a decreased FWM efficiency. For example, there is a 12 dB improvement in the FWM efficiency when the wavelength difference or spacing between wavelengths carried on an optical fiber is changed from 0.8 nm to 1.6 nm for the same fiber slope and dispersion. This can be demonstrated by using an analytical model for FWM efficiency. The mixing efficiently, η, is found to be,

${\eta \cong \frac{\alpha^{2}}{\alpha^{2} + {\Delta\beta}^{2}}},$ where α is the fiber loss constant (typically 0.000046/meter for TW-C) and Δβ is the phase matching term given by

${\Delta\beta} = {\frac{2\pi\; c}{\lambda^{2}}\frac{\mathbb{d}D}{\mathbb{d}\lambda}\left( {\frac{\lambda_{1} + \lambda_{2}}{2} - \lambda_{0}} \right)({\Delta\lambda})^{2}}$ where dD/dλ is the fiber dispersion slope, λ1 and λ2 are the interfering channel wavelengths, and λ0 is the fiber zero dispersion wavelength. Notice that Δβ has an inverse relationship with the mixing efficiency i.e. the lower the Δβ, the higher the mixing efficiency and, correspondingly, the higher the power in the mixing term. From the second equation, we see that as the wavelength difference between optical signals carried by the optical fiber (i.e., the channel spacing) is doubled from 0.8 nm to 1.6 nm, Δβ increases by a factor of four. This quadrupling of the phase matching term will reduce the mixing efficiency and lead to lower FWM powers. For example, consider the following numerical example. Using typical values (λ0=1510 nm and the slope=0.05 ps/nm2-km), the resulting Δβ at 0.8 nm spacing is 0.001 while Δβ at 1.6 nm channel spacing is four times higher at 0.004. This results in η(0.8) of 0.00211/m and a η(1.6) of 0.000136/m which is 15.5 times lower and so results in a 11.8 dB reduction in mixing power.

As noted above, the number of mixing products increases exponentially with the number of optical signals of different wavelengths that are used in the network to transmit information (i.e., the number of channels), but the power of the mixing terms decreases for wavelengths that are further away from the wavelengths of the optical signals generating the FWM, due to the increasing phase mismatch. This can be seen in the second equation provided above, where the phase matching increases with the square of the difference in wavelengths. As a result, there is lower mixing efficiently for widely separated wavelengths. Consequently, as the number of channels is increased beyond the 5, the power of the mixing products do not increase significantly.

The example ROADM embodiments disclosed herein can be configured to allocate wider channel spacing to decrease the power of the FWM cross products. According to one example embodiment, a ROADM that implements this solution can include 44 add ports and 44 drop ports, each containing a tunable laser for adding optical signals of different wavelengths to the ROADM. The add and drop ports are examples of local interfaces of the ROADM, and the local interfaces of the ROADM are not limited to these add and drop ports, but can include any type of interface through which optical signals can be added or dropped from the ROADM locally (i.e., not added from or dropped to the network to which the ROADM is connected). This ROADM is normally configured in a first configuration to add optical signals at each of the 44 add ports whose wavelengths are spaced apart by 100 GHz, i.e., the bandwidth of each add port is a predetermined and fixed 100 GHz. Thus, for example, the optical signal added at add port #1 can be 191.65 THz, the optical signal added at add port #2 can be 191.75 THz, the optical signal added at add port #3 can be 191.85 THz, etc., up to 195.95 THz for add port #44. Thus, in the first configuration, the wavelengths of the added optical signals can be represented by a set of monotonically increasing wavelength values spaced apart by a first minimum frequency difference of 100 GHz from 191.65 THz to 195.95 THz, each wavelength value including an even or odd member of the set, and the set including alternating even and odd members of the set. But such an arrangement with a fixed wavelength spacing does not reduce the FWM cross products generated by the network of which the ROADM is a part. The inventors have discovered that such a ROADM can be reconfigured into a second configuration to suppress and/or reduce the power of FWM cross products that are generated when multiplexed optical signals are output onto an optical fiber that produces FWM, by, for example, 1) adding optical signals at only 22 add ports, and 2) adding optical signals on those 22 add ports whose wavelengths are spaced apart by at least 200 GHz, which is denoted as a second minimum frequency difference. This can be accomplished, for example, by a control device that controls the input and/or processing of the added optical signals input into the ROADM so that the optical signals that are transmitted from a network interface of the ROADM to the network have a second minimum frequency difference that is greater than the first minimum frequency difference. Consequently, in this example embodiment, the control device controls the number of add ports through which optical signals are added to the ROADM, determines the specific add ports through which optical signals are added to the ROADM, and controls the wavelength of the optical signals added at each of the add ports. However, the control device is not limited to use in this example embodiment and is not limited to these functions. It can be used in any of the example embodiments discussed below to control any specific elements of the ROADMs and nodes described below so as to control the input and/or processing of optical signals input into the ROADM either locally or from the network so that the input signals transmitted from a network interface of the ROADM to the network have a minimum frequency difference that is greater than the minimum frequency difference of optical signals input into the ROADM from the network and/or locally, or that is greater than the minimum frequency difference of optical signals input on local interfaces of the ROADM when all the local interfaces input optical signals. When all the add ports input optical signals, the minimum frequency difference of the input optical signals can be the first minimum frequency difference noted above. Thus, for example, add port #1 can be configured to add an optical signal whose wavelength is 191.65 THz, add port #2 can be configured not to add an optical signal, add port #3 can be configured to add an optical signal whose wavelength is 191.85 THz, add port #4 can be configured not to add an optical signal, add port #5 can be configured to add an optical signal whose wavelength is 192.05 THz, etc. In other words, the ROADM can be reconfigured to a second configuration to double the difference or spacing between wavelengths of optical signals added at the active add ports, compared to the wavelength difference or spacing that is used when all 44 add ports are used. Thus, in the second configuration, the optical signals added the ROADM and transmitted from the ROADM to the network interface thereof have wavelengths corresponding to only the even or odd members of the set of added wavelengths. This configuration can reduce the optical power of the deleterious FWM cross products by a factor of 16. It should be understood that it is within the scope of this embodiment to use ROADMs having more or fewer than 44 add ports and 44 drop ports, that have a wavelength spacing before being reconfigured to reduce FWM of more than or less than 100 GHz, to have a wavelength spacing after being reconfigured to reduce FWM of more than or less than 200 GHZ, and that contain add ports that receive optical signals outside of the range of 191.65-195.95, and that even in ROADMs having 44 add ports, it is within the scope of this example embodiment to use fewer or more than 22 add ports to add fewer or more than 22 optical signals to the ROADM. More generally, it is within the scope of this example embodiment to reduce the power of FWM cross products by using the control device to use less than all the add ports in the second configuration to input optical signals, or to use fewer than all the wavelengths supported by the ROADM, and/or when the ROADM is reconfigured to reduce FWM, to use fewer than the number of wavelengths used before such reconfiguration. Thus, it is also within the scope of this example embodiment to use the control device to change the wavelength difference between optical signals added at different add ports so that the wavelength difference is greater than or less than twice the wavelength difference that is used when all the add ports are used. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment to use other interfaces, besides the add ports, to add optical signals thereto that are spaced apart, for example, by 100 GHz (in the first configuration) or 200 GHz (in the second configuration). Such other interfaces can include another type of local interface, such as an express port of the ROADM (i.e., a port that receives optical signals from another ROADM or other optical element in the same node) or the network interface of the ROADM that receives optical signals from other nodes of the network of which the ROADM is a part.

In another example embodiment, a type-4 ROADM can contain 44 add ports that add optical signals with a 100 GHz wavelength spacing therebetween. In this example embodiment, the type-4 ROADM that is used can be the same as or different from the previously-discussed type-4 ROADMs, and it is within the scope of this example embodiment to substitute an optical element (or elements) for the type-4 ROADM that performs (or perform) the same or similar functions thereof. In this example embodiment, the ROADM can be reconfigured so that the control device determines that optical signals are added at every other port (i.e., every other add port is active) to provide 22 add ports with a 200 GHz spacing, which decreases the optical power of FWM cross products. More generally, ROADMs with colored add ports, such as type-4 ROADMs, can be used to suppress FWM cross products by employing up to half of the add ports thereof. This can be accomplished, for example, by programming the type-4 light combiner in the type-4 ROADM to transmit optical signals added at up to half of the add ports, and by a) refraining from connecting lasers at up to half the add ports, b) programming the type-4 light combiner to extinguish optical signals added at the up to half of the add ports, or c) by refraining from powering the lasers at up to half of the add ports. In this example embodiment, the control device can control the connecting of the lasers at the add ports, and the powering of the lasers connected to the add ports. In addition, in this example embodiment, the control device can include the type-4 light combiner. In other example embodiments, ROADMs having colorless add ports (including but not limited to any of the previously-discussed ROADMs having colorless add ports) can also be used to suppress the generation of FWM cross products. In one such colorless-add-port example embodiment, optical signals added at the add ports can be passively coupled together with an optical coupler and those passively coupled signals can be passively added to optical signals from a wavelength router, as can be done with a type-1 ROADM. In this example embodiment, no separate configuring of the wavelength router need be performed (although it can be). Rather, the control device can control the transponders of the ROADM or connected to the ROADM to be tuned to every other wavelength (in the set of wavelengths supported by the ROADM, i.e., the even members of the set or the odd members of the set) in order to suppress the generation of FWM cross products. Since the type-1 ROADM may have fewer add ports than the number of wavelengths supported thereby, the control device can use every add port as long as the number of add ports is no more than ½ the number of wavelengths supported. In another colorless-add-port example embodiment, optical signals added at the add ports can be directly input into a type-4 light combiner, as can be done with the type-3 ROADM. In this case, the type-4 light combiner in the ROADM can be configured to pass the added wavelengths to the output thereof. Once again, every add port can be used as long as the number of add ports is no more than ½ the number of wavelengths supported by the wavelength router. In another example embodiment, every add port can be used even if the number of add ports is more than ½ the number of wavelengths supported. In this example embodiment, the wavelength spacing of optical signals input at the add ports may not be the same for all adjacent wavelengths, but as long as the wavelength spacing is increased for some pairs of adjacent input wavelengths, the power of some FWM cross produces will be reduced.

Another example embodiment uses a different approach to suppressing the FWM cross products. This example embodiment can be used in addition to or as an alternative to the above-described embodiment. In this example embodiment, rather than doubling the channel spacing, a ROADM that can be the same as or different from the previously-discussed ROADMs (or other optical element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar functions thereof) can be configured to change the bandwidth of different add ports and to change the wavelength of each channel (i.e., the center wavelength of the optical signals added at the add ports), so that the bandwidth of each channel and the wavelength spacing or difference between adjacent channels is not always the same, as it is in the embodiment discussed above. (In this example embodiment, all of the add ports can be used if needed, but it is not necessary.) Such unequal channel spacings and unequal channel bandwidths cause some of the cross products of FWM to fall outside the bandwidth of the channels. More specifically, in the case where the filter bandwidth in each add port of a ROADM (or other optical element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar functions thereof) is about half of the channel spacing, which is a typical configuration, the add-port bandwidth and the wavelength of each channel (i.e., the center wavelength of an optical signal added at each channel) can be selected so that a substantial portion of the FWM cross products produced by three wavelengths in three adjacent channels fall outside the filter bandwidth of the add ports at which those three wavelengths are added. For example, in a ROADM with 44 add ports and 44 drop ports, where the 43^(rd) add port is configured to have a bandwidth of 50 GHz and the center wavelength added at this add port is 196 THz, the filter in this add port passes any wavelength between 195.975 THz and 196.025 THz. In this case, the bandwidth of the add ports and the center wavelength of the add ports can be selected so that a substantial portion of the FWM cross products produced by the optical signal added at add port #43 and by two adjacent optical signals added at other add ports at 196.1 THz and 195.9 THz, fall outside the range from 195.975 THz to 196.025 of add port #43.

Table 1, reproduced below, provides an example of such an unequal-channel-spacing configuration for a ROADM with 44 add ports and 44 drop ports. In this example, the ROADM is configured so that optical signals are added only at the odd numbered add ports. In other words, the even numbered add ports are inactive and the odd numbered add ports are active. The table provides the bandwidth of each channel. Since the bandwidth for each of channels 1-3 is 50 GHz, the wavelength spacing or difference between active channels 1 and 3 is 100 GHz. Since the bandwidth for channels 4 and 5 is 75 GHz, the wavelength spacing or difference between active channels 3 and 5 is 137.5 GHz. Since the bandwidth for channels 6 and 7 is 75 GHz, the wavelength spacing or difference between active channels 5 and 7 is 150 GHz. And since the bandwidth for channel 8 is 75 GHz and the bandwidth for channel 9 is 100 GHz, the wavelength spacing or difference between active channels 7 and 9 is 162.5. Thus, in this example, while the wavelength spacing between every adjacent channel is not different, it is different for many adjacent channels. In other words, for at least two pairs of adjacent add ports, the center wavelength difference of one add port pair is different than the center wavelength difference of the other add port pair. In addition, in this example, shown in Table 1, for at least two adjacent pairs of adjacent add ports, such as the pairs of ports 2 and 3, and 3 and 4, the center wavelength difference of one add port pair (e.g., for pair of ports 2 and 3, the wavelength difference is 50 GHz, since the bandwidth of port 2 is 50 GHz and the bandwidth of port 3 is 50 GHz) is different than the center wavelength difference of the other adjacent add port pair (e.g., for pair of ports 3 and 4, the wavelength difference is 62.50 GHz, since the bandwidth of port 3 is 50 GHz and the bandwidth of port 4 is 75 GHz). It should be understood that it is also within the scope of this example embodiment to select the channel bandwidth and central frequency of each channel so that the wavelength spacing or difference between every pair of adjacent channels is different. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment to apply the Table 1 uneven-channel-spacing scheme to ROADMs that are the same as or different from the previously-discussed ROADMs, to ROADMs that have more than or fewer than 44 add and drop ports, and to other optical elements that perform the same or similar function as ROADMs. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment to use a different uneven-channel-spacing scheme 1) that applies to any wavelength input into any type of ROADM or an optical element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar functions, and/or 2) that applies to ROADMs and optical elements that perform the same or similar functions using different channel bandwidths than those shown in Table 1, as long as the wavelength spacing between two adjacent center wavelengths in one pair of adjacent center wavelengths of one pair of adjacent add ports is different from the wavelength spacing between two adjacent center wavelengths of another pair of adjacent center wavelengths of another pair of adjacent add ports.

TABLE 1 Channel Bandwidth in GHz 1 50 2 50 3 50 4 75 5 75 6 75 7 75 8 75 9 100 10 100 11 100 12 100 13 75 14 75 15 75 16 75 17 100 18 100 19 100 20 100 21 125 22 125 23 125 24 125 25 175 26 175 27 175 28 175 29 150 30 151 31 150 32 150 33 125 34 125 35 125 36 125 37 100 38 100 39 100 40 100 41 75 42 75 43 50 44 50

The bandwidth and central frequency of each channel and add port can be changed, for example, by using switching elements in conjunction with the tunable laser, both of which are provided within each add port of the ROADM. In one example embodiment, a ROADM may contain 512 of these switching elements, which can be configured to act as programmable filters to change the bandwidth and center frequency and wavelength of optical signals added at each add port by changing the pass band characteristics of the add ports, such as the width and sharpness of the pass band.

In addition, in this example embodiment, in which not every add port is active, the ROADM can be configured to block any FWM cross products that are produced in the inactive add ports from being transmitted from the ROADM and/or mixing with the other optical signals transmitted from the ROADM, further reducing the deleterious effects of FWM on the active channels. This can be accomplished, for example, in ROADMs having a type-4 light combiner, by programming the type-4 light combiner to extinguish optical signals added at the inactive add ports. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment to block FWM cross products produced in the inactive add ports of other types of ROADMs or other optical elements performing the same or similar functions, and to block such FWM cross products using other means besides a type-4 light combiner.

FIGS. 60 and 61 show other example embodiments for suppressing and/or otherwise mitigating against FWM cross products. In these example embodiments, an optical node is provided that can suppress and/or otherwise mitigate against FWM cross products from being generated by optical signals received from a network interface by a ROADM and passed through the ROADM to another network interface and then to an optical fiber that contains non-linear transmission characteristics prone to generating FWM cross products. The optical node in these example embodiments can suppress and/or otherwise mitigate against the FWM cross products from being generated after the optical signals leave the node by increasing the wavelength spacing between at least two wavelengths of at least two optical signals transmitted from the ROADM to a network or another node. The nodes in these example embodiments can include additional elements not shown in FIGS. 60 and 61. In addition, the ROADMs and transponders in the nodes in these example embodiments can be replaced by other optical elements that perform the same or similar functions. Also, the ROADMs shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 can be the same as or different from the previously discussed ROADMs shown in FIGS. 8-20, 26, 28-30, 32-58, and 59A-59H.

FIG. 60 shows such an example embodiment by depicting optical node 900, which can include two type-1 ROADM cores, including a West ROADM 901 and an East ROADM 902. The optical node 900 can be part of a network that contains other nodes. The West ROADM 901 can comprise an input fiber 1A (denoted by reference numeral 903) receiving signals from the network, and fiber 1B (denoted by reference numeral 904) transmitting signals to the network, while the East ROADM can comprise fiber 2A (denoted by reference numeral 905) receiving signals from the network, and fiber 2B (denoted by reference numeral 906) transmitting signals to the network. The ROADM 901 can also include a type-4 light distributor 907 receiving optical signals from the fiber 1A, a type-1A k:1 light combiner 908 combining optical signals as will be further discussed below, while the ROADM 902 can also include a type-4 light distributor 909 receiving signals from the fiber 2A, and a type-1A k:1 light combiner 910 combining optical signals as will be further discussed below. In addition, the two ROADMs 901 and 902 can be connected by fiber optic interconnect 911 including two fibers, each connecting an express in port of one of the ROADMs to the express out port of the other of the ROADMs, as will be further discussed below. Attached to the West ROADM 901 are transponders 912 and 913 (also denoted as transponders 1A and 1B, respectively), which change the wavelength of optical signals dropped from the West ROADM 901 to non-colored optical signals 914 and 915, respectively, and then transmit the non-colored optical signals dropped from the West ROADM 901, to transponders 916 and 917 connected to the East ROADM 902, which convert the non-colored optical signals to wavelengths different from the wavelength inputted into the transponders 912 and 913, respectively, so as to increase the wavelength spacing of optical signals output from the West ROADM 901, as will be discussed in more detail below. Thus, the control device that controls the inputting and/or processing of optical signals input into the ROADM to increase the minimum frequency difference of optical signals output from the ROADM to the network can comprise the transponders 912, 913, 916, and 917. In addition, the transponders 916 and 917 change the wavelength of optical signals dropped from the East ROADM 902 to non-colored optical signals 915 a and 914 a, respectively, and then transmit the non-colored optical signals dropped from the East ROADM 902 to the transponders 912 and 913, respectively, which convert the non-colored optical signals to wavelengths different from the wavelengths inputted into the transponders 916 and 917, so as to decrease increase the wavelength spacing of optical signals output from the West ROADM 901.

The West ROADM 901 can interface with the network via a west interface 920 and SMF-28 fiber (which causes no FWM effects), while the East ROADM 902 can interface with the network via an east interface 922 and a non-SMF-28 fiber (which causes FWM effects). Arriving on fiber 1A, can be, for example, five optical signals of consecutive wavelengths, each spaced 100 GHz apart and denoted by λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, and λ5. (And in the opposite direction, West ROADM 901 can transmit optical signals to another node and/or the network over the fiber 1B, where the optical signals include a signal that enters the East ROADM 902 over fiber 2A.) In one example, embodiment, all five wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, and λ5 can be passed from the West ROADM 901 to the East ROADM 902 and then to the east interface 922 via fiber 2B to another node and/or the rest of the network. In order to prevent FWM effects on the optical signals exiting fiber 2B to the network, two of the five optical signals arriving at the west interface 920 can be converted to optical signals of different wavelengths to increase their wavelength spacing with respect to adjacent wavelengths. More specifically, λ2 and λ4 can be converted to λ7 and λ9, respectively. λ7 can be spaced 200 GHz from λ5, and λ9 can be spaced 200 GHz from λ7. This can be accomplished, for example, by first programming the wavelength router 907 in the West ROADM 901 to drop λ2 and λ4 to the drop ports 926 thereof, while programming the wavelength router 907 in the West ROADM to pass through λ1, λ3, and λ5 to the East ROADM 902. λ1, λ3, and λ5 can be transmitted from the wavelength router 907 to the express out port 928 of the ROADM 901 and then to the express in port 930 of the East ROADM 902, after which they can enter a 2:1 coupler 932, which can combine these signals with λ7 and λ9, as will be discussed below, and can transmit the combined signal to the fiber 2B and then to the east interface 922. (The k:1 optical coupler 908 of the West ROADM 901 can combine optical signals from fiber 2A that are dropped from the East ROADM 902 by the wavelength router 909 and converted to another wavelength by the transponders 912, 913, 916, and 917, as will be discussed below, with optical signals passed through the wavelength router 909). The k:1 optical coupler 910 of the East ROADM 902 can combine optical signals dropped from the West ROADM 901 and converted by the transponders 912, 913, 916, and 917, as will be discussed in more detail below. In addition, the two ROADMs 901 and 902 can be connected by the fiber optic interconnect 911 including two fibers, each connecting the express in port of one of the ROADMs to the express out port of the other of the ROADMs. Thus, the interconnect 911 connects the express out port 928 of the West ROADM 901 with the express in port 930 of the East ROADM 901 and connects the express out port 934 of the East ROADM 902 with the express in port 936 of the West ROADM 901. The dropped wavelengths, λ2 and λ4, dropped from drop ports 926 of the West ROADM 901 can be converted to non-colored optical signals by transponder 1A and transponder 1B, respectively. The transponders 913 and 912 can transmit the non-colored optical signals to transponder 2B and transponder 2A, respectively, where they can be converted to λ7 and λ9, respectively, and transmitted to the add ports 938 of the East ROADM 902 and then to the k:1 coupler 910 inside the East ROADM 902, which can combine λ7 and λ9 into a single signal that itself can be combined with λ1, λ3, and λ5 by the 2:1 coupler 932. The five wavelengths can then be passed out the east interface 922 via fiber 2B. The five wavelengths are now spaced by 200 GHz, and therefore the FWM effects can be substantially suppressed. In addition, the same procedure can be performed in reverse with signals entering fiber 2A of the East ROADM 902 being passed through to the West ROADM 901 via the distributor 909, the express out port 934, the express in port 936, and a 2:1 coupler 940 inside the West ROADM 901, which combines the passed through signals with signals from the light combiner 908 that combines signals entering the West ROADM 901 from add ports 942. The signals entering the West ROADM 901 from the add ports 942 are signals that have been dropped by the light distributor 909 of the East ROADM 902 to the drop ports 944 thereof, which enter the transponders 916 and 917, are converted to non-colored optical signals 915 a and 914 a, respectively, enter the transponders 912 and 913, are converted to a different wavelength than their original wavelength, and transmitted to the add ports 942.

FIG. 60 uses four bidirectional transponders. Such an arrangement allows wavelengths arriving on the east interface 922 to be converted to different wavelengths prior to exiting on the west interface 920, using the same four transponders in the same manner as was discussed above for signals transmitted in the opposite direction from the west interface 920 to the east interface 922. For instance, if λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7, and λ9 arrive on fiber 2A, the same set of four transponders could then be used to convert λ7 and λ9 to λ2 and λ4, respectively, prior to exiting the node 900 on fiber 1B.

In the FIG. 60 example embodiment, optical signals can be input into the West ROADM 901 for processing via at least three different routes: from the west interface 920, from the add ports 942, and from the express in port 936. Each of these elements that receive optical signals is denoted as a local interface. And optical signals can be input into the East ROADM 902 for processing via the east interface 922, the add ports 938, and the express in port 930. Each of these elements of the East ROADM 902 that receive optical signals is denoted also as a local interface. As will be discussed below, the FIG. 61 example embodiment also has west and east interfaces, add ports, and express in ports, and these each of these elements is also denoted as a local interface. In both of these example embodiments, the ROADMs can be configured in at least two different configurations. In a first configuration, the type-4 light distributor, for example distributor 907 of the West ROADM 901, passes all of the optical signals it receives through to the other ROADM, for example, the East ROADM 902. As a result, if the signals λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, and λ5 input into the West ROADM 901 on any of the local interfaces are 100 GHz apart, the signals output from the East ROADM 902 via the east interface 922 to NZDSF or DSF fiber types will be spaced apart by a first minimum frequency difference of 100 GHz and produce FWM cross products on the NZDSF or DSF fiber types. But the West ROADM 901 can be configured into a second configuration so that signals λ2 and λ4 are dropped to the drop ports 926, and converted into signals λ7 and λ9 by the transponders 912, 913, 916, and 917, so that the signals output from the East ROADM 902 via the east interface 922 to NZDSF or DSF fiber types will be spaced 200 GHz apart, which is a second minimum frequency difference greater than the first minimum frequency difference, thereby reducing the power of the FWM cross products on the NZDSF or DSF fiber types. In other words, in the second configuration, the wavelength values of each pair of adjacent output optical wavelengths output from the east interface 922 are spaced apart by the second minimum frequency difference, which is larger than the first minimum frequency difference.

It is within the scope of this example embodiment for the optical node 900 to contain more than two type-1 ROADMs and for the optical node 900 to contain other types of optical elements and other types of ROADMs, including any of the other previously discussed ROADMs, such as those shown in FIGS. 8-20, 26, 28-30, 32-58, and 59A-59H. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment for the West ROADM 901 to interface with non-SMF-28 fiber and for the East ROADM 902 to interface with SMF-28 fiber. In addition, it is within the scope of this example embodiment for more or fewer than five optical signals of different wavelengths to be received on fiber 903, for the wavelength spacing of adjacent wavelengths input into the ROADMs to be different and for the wavelength spacing of adjacent wavelengths outputted from the ROADMs to be different, for the wavelength spacing of adjacent wavelengths of optical signals outputted from the ROADMs to be more than or less than 200 GHz, and for the wavelength spacing of adjacent wavelengths input into the ROADMs to be more or less that 100 GHz. Also, it is within the scope of this example embodiment to convert more or fewer than two optical signals to other wavelengths using the transponders 912, 913, 916, and 917, and to employ more or fewer than four transponders. In addition, it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the type-1 ROADMs 901 and 902 to be the same as or different from the type-1ROADMs discussed in the other portions of this specification.

Alternatively, if the wavelengths of optical signals need only to be converted in one direction, two transponders could be utilized, as shown in FIG. 61, which shows the use of only two transponders in the optical node.

FIG. 61 shows an example embodiment of an optical node 1000, which can include two type-1 ROADM cores, including a West ROADM 1001 and an East ROADM 1002. The ROADMs 1001 and 1002 can be the same as or different from the ROADMs 901 and 902, respectively, shown in FIG. 60. In addition, the node 1000 can include additional elements not shown in FIG. 61, and instead of using each of ROADMs 1001 and 1002, can include an optical element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar function. The optical node 1000 can be part of a network that contains other nodes. The West ROADM 1001 can comprise an input fiber 1A (denoted by reference numeral 1003) receiving signals from the network, and fiber 1B (denoted by reference numeral 1004) transmitting signals to the network, while the East ROADM can comprise fiber 2A (denoted by reference numeral 1005) receiving signals from the network, and fiber 2B (denoted by reference numeral 1006) transmitting signals to the network. The ROADM 1001 can also include a type-4 light distributor 1007 receiving optical signals from the fiber 1A, a type-1A k:1 light combiner 1008 combining optical signals as will be further discussed below, while the ROADM 1002 can also include a type-4 light distributor 1009 receiving signals from the fiber 2A, and a type-1A k:1 light combiner 1010 combining optical signals as will be further discussed below. In addition, the two ROADMs 1001 and 1002 can be connected by fiber optic interconnect 1011 including two fibers, each connecting an express in port of one of the ROADMs to the express out port of the other of the ROADMs, as will be further discussed below. Attached to the West ROADM 1001 are transponders 1012 and 1013 (also denoted as transponders 1A and 1B, respectively). The transponders 1012 and 1013 can operate as unidirectional transponders, which except for their unidirectional operation, can be the same as or different from the transponders 912 and 913 shown in FIG. 60. However, it is within the scope of this embodiment for the transponders 1012 and 1013 to operate as bidirectional transponders. The transponders 1012 and 1013 can be configured to 1) change the wavelength of optical signals dropped from the West ROADM 1001 to non-colored optical signals 1014 and 1015, respectively, and then 2) convert the non-colored optical signals to wavelengths different from the wavelength inputted into the transponders 1012 and 1013, respectively, so as to increase the wavelength spacing of optical signals output from the East ROADM 1002, as will be discussed in more detail below. Thus, the control device that controls the inputting and/or processing of optical signals input into the ROADM to increase the minimum frequency difference of optical signals output from the ROADM to the network can comprise the transponders 1012 and 1013.

The West ROADM 1001 can interface with the network via a west interface 1020 and SMF-28 fiber (which causes no FWM effects), while the East ROADM 1002 can interface with the network via an east interface 1022 and a non-SMF-28 fiber (which causes FWM effects). Arriving on fiber 1A, can be, for example, five optical signals of consecutive wavelengths, each spaced 100 GHz apart and denoted by λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, and λ5. (And in the opposite direction, West ROADM 1001 can transmit optical signals to another node and/or the network over the fiber 1B, where the optical signals include a signal that enters the East ROADM 1002 over fiber 2A.) In one example, embodiment, all five wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, and λ5 can be passed from the West ROADM 1001 to the East ROADM 1002 and then to the east interface 1022 via fiber 2B to another node and/or the rest of the network. In order to prevent FWM effects on the optical signals exiting fiber 2B to the network, two of the five optical signals arriving at the west interface 1020 can be converted to optical signals of different wavelengths to increase their wavelength spacing with respect to adjacent wavelengths. More specifically, λ2 and λ4 can be converted to λ7 and λ9, respectively. λ7 can be spaced 200 GHz from λ5, and λ9 can be spaced 200 GHz from λ7. This can be accomplished, for example, by first programming the wavelength router 1007 in the West ROADM 1001 to drop λ2 and λ4 to the drop ports 1026 thereof, while programming the wavelength router 1007 in the West ROADM to pass through λ1, λ3, and λ5 to the East ROADM 1002. λ1, λ3, and λ5 can be transmitted from the wavelength router 1007 to the express out port 1028 of the ROADM 1001 and then to the express in port 1030 of the East ROADM 1002, after which they can enter a 2:1 coupler 1032, which can combine these signals with λ7 and λ9, as will be discussed below, and can transmit the combined signal to the fiber 2B and then to the east interface 1022. The k:1 optical coupler 1010 of the East ROADM 1002 can combine optical signals dropped from the West ROADM 1001 and converted by the transponders 1012 and 1013, as will be discussed in more detail below. In addition, the two ROADMs 1001 and 1002 can be connected by the fiber optic interconnect 1011 including two fibers, each connecting the express in port of one of the ROADMs to the express out port of the other of the ROADMs. Thus, the interconnect 1011 connects the express out port 1028 of the West ROADM 1001 with the express in port 1030 of the East ROADM 1002 and connects the express out port 1034 of the East ROADM 1002 with the express in port 1036 of the West ROADM 1001. The dropped wavelengths, λ2 and λ4, dropped from drop ports 1026 of the West ROADM 1001 can be converted to non-colored optical signals 1014 and 1015 by transponder 1A and transponder 1B, respectively. The transponders 1012 and 1013 can also convert the non-colored optical signals to λ7 and λ9, respectively, and transmit them to the add ports 1038 of the East ROADM 1002 and then to the k:1 coupler 1010 inside the East ROADM 1002, which can combine λ7 and λ9 into a single signal that itself can be combined with λ1, λ3, and λ5 by the 2:1 coupler 1032. The five wavelengths can then be passed out the east interface 1022 via fiber 2B. The five wavelengths are now spaced by 200 GHz, and therefore the FWM effects can be substantially suppressed.

In another alternative example embodiment, the ROADMs in the nodes in FIGS. 60 and 61 (and the nodes in the other example embodiments of this application) can be configured to suppress and/or otherwise mitigate against FWM cross products when an optical fiber cable over which optical signals are received from a network by a ROADM and/or an optical fiber cable receiving signals transmitted by a ROADM have non-linear transmission characteristics that produce FWM cross products. This can be accomplished, as noted above, by increasing the wavelength spacing and/or using unequal bandwidth channels.

In still another alternative example embodiment, the ROADMs in the nodes in FIGS. 60 and 61 (and the nodes in the other example embodiments in this application) can be configured to suppress and/or otherwise mitigate against FWM cross products in optical signals transmitted to a network interface and a network as a result of ROADMs combining optical signals, such as for example optical signals a) received from another node or the network, b) added locally at one of the ROADMs via add ports thereof, c) received on different of the network interfaces associated with respective degrees of a multi-degree ROADM such as if, for example, the node 900 or 1000 is modified for purposes of illustration to further become a node of greater than 2 degrees (such as 4-degrees, for example, in accordance with the teachings herein associated with FIG. 19), and/or d) received by the ROADMs from any other source of optical signals. For example, in addition to receiving optical signals λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, and λ5 from the west interface 920 or 1020 in FIGS. 60 and 61, respectively, converting wavelengths λ2 and λ4 to wavelengths λ7 and λ9, and outputting wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7, and λ9 at the East Interface, the East ROADM 902 or 1002 can be configured 1) to add one or more optical signals of different wavelengths, for example, wavelength λ11, spaced 200 GHz apart from λ9, and λ13, spaced 200 GHz from wavelength λ11 (which, for example, may be locally-added wavelengths), at the add ports thereof and to combine those wavelengths with wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7, and λ9 in the 2:1 coupler 932 of the East ROADM 902 and the 2:1 coupler 1032 of the East ROADM 1002 and/or 2) to receive optical signals from one or more other ROADMs (not shown in FIGS. 60 and 61) or other sources of optical signals in the same node 900 or 1000 or from another node via, for example, one or more add ports that functions or function as an express in port, such as, for example, wavelengths λ15, λ17, and λ19, and to combine these wavelengths with wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7, and λ9 (and with wavelengths λ11 and λ13 if these wavelengths are added) in the 2:1 coupler 932 of the East ROADM 902 or 2:1 coupler 1032 of the East ROADM 1002, assuming λ15, λ17, and λ19 are spaced 200 GHz apart from each other and that the lowest wavelength in this set is spaced 200 GHz apart from the highest wavelength entering the 2:1 coupler. If any of the optical signals received from another optical source or from another ROADM, such as λ15, λ17, and λ19, are not spaced 200 GHz apart from each other or if the lowest wavelength in this set is not spaced 200 GHz apart from the highest wavelength entering the 2:1 coupler 932 in the East ROADM 902 or the 2:1 coupler 1032 in the East ROADM 1002, one or more of the transponders in the node 900 or 1000 (i.e., the control device) can be configured to convert such optical signals to another wavelength to preserve the 200 GHz spacing between wavelengths that are transmitted to the East Interface on fiber 2B. It is within the scope of this example embodiment for this entire process to be used when transmitting signals in the opposite direction from the East ROADM 902 to the West ROADM 901. In this case, optical signals are transmitted to the network from fiber 1B from the West Interface, as a result of combining signals received from the East Interface over fiber 2A with signals added locally at the add ports of the West ROADM 901 and/or signals added, for example at one or more add ports of the West ROADM 901 from other ROADMs (not shown) and/or signals from other optical sources, when those one or more add ports functions or function as one or more express in ports. It is also within the scope of these example embodiments to configure the ROADMs and transponders to use a different spacing between wavelengths and to combine a different number of optical signals than are discussed above. With further reference to the additional teachings mentioned above associated with the multi-degree optical node illustrated in FIG. 19, by way of further example, such additional three wavelengths λ15, λ17, and λ19 may be transmitted by the node at the network node interface associated with one of the four illustrated ROADM cores (e.g., interface 188 a), together with wavelengths λ11 and λ13 that may be locally-added at that same ROADM core (e.g., through input 188 f), may each be received by the multi-degree optical node at the network node interface respectively associated with a different one of the other three illustrated ROADM cores (e.g., λ15 received by the node at interface 182 a, λ17 received by the node at interface 184 a, and λ19 received by the node at interface 186 a) and, in turn, passed (e.g., through inputs 188 g, 188 h and 188 i) to the fourth ROADM core 188 from which the signals are transmitted from the node through its associated network node interface. Similarly, transponders also may be used in this added context to convert one or more wavelengths to different wavelengths if warranted so as to ensure adequate spacing to mitigate against FWM.

Wavelength Reassignment and Wavelength Translation Embodiment

Accordingly to another example embodiment, FWM cross products can be suppressed by increasing the wavelength spacing between optical signals of adjacent wavelengths by wavelength reassignment and wavelength translation. FIG. 62 shows an example embodiment of a DWDM network 1100 in which wavelength reassignment or wavelength translation can be performed. The network contains five optical add/drop nodes: node 1102 (node A), node 1104 (node B), node 1106 (node C), node 1108 (node D), and node 1110 (node E). But it should be understood that network 1100 is not limited to this number of nodes and can contain more than or fewer than five optical add/drop nodes. Moreover, these nodes A-E can contain one or more of the example ROADMs shown in FIGS. 8-20, 26, 28-30, 32-58, 59A-59H, 60, and 61, any element or elements that performs or perform the same or similar functions, and/or other optical functions. Nodes A, C, and D can be constructed as two degree ROADM nodes (each of which can be connected to two other nodes), while nodes B and E can be constructed as three degree ROADM nodes (each of which can be connected to three other nodes). But ROADM nodes A, C, and D are not limited to being two degree ROADM nodes and can also be ROADM nodes of other degrees. Similarly, ROADM nodes B and E are not limited to being three degree ROADM nodes and can also be ROADM nodes of other degrees. The nodes A-E can be connected by bidirectional optical fiber link pairs. Each pair is depicted in FIG. 62 as a single line between nodes. The bidirectional fiber link pair 1112 between nodes B and C can be constructed using a Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber (NZDSF), which can cause FWM when a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths is transmitted therealong. The bidirectional fiber link pairs between all other nodes can use SMF-28 fiber, which does not cause FWM when a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths is transmitted therealong. But, the bidirectional fiber link pair 1112 between nodes B and C can also be constructed using other types of optic fiber cable besides (NZDSF), and the bidirectional fiber link pairs between all other nodes can use other types of optical fiber cables besides SMF-28 fiber. In addition, the fiber optic cable linking any of the nodes is not limited to bidirectional fiber link pairs and can be a unidirectional cable.

In the network 1100, the ROADMs in each node can support optical signals of eight wavelengths (denoted as λ1 through λ8) and including a set of monotonically increasing wavelength values, where two consecutive members of the set are called adjacent wavelengths or adjacent wavelength values, and optical signals of two adjacent wavelengths are denoted as adjacent optical signals). But it is also within the scope of this example embodiment for each ROADM in the network 1100 to support optical signals of more than or fewer than eight wavelengths. The supported eight wavelengths can be spaced apart by 100 GHz. For example, wavelength λ1 can utilize the frequency 192.1 THz, wavelength λ2 can utilize the frequency 192.2 THz, wavelength λ3 can utilize the frequency 192.3 THz, wavelength λ4 can utilize the frequency 192.4 THz, wavelength λ5 can utilize the frequency 192.5 THz, wavelength λ6 can utilize the frequency 192.6 THz, wavelength λ7 can utilize the frequency 192.71 THz, and wavelength λ8 can utilize the frequency 192.8 THz. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the ROADMs in the network 1100 to support optical signals with wavelengths spaced apart by more than or less than 100 GHz, and for the wavelengths to take on values other than 192.1 THz-192.8 THz.

Table 2 below shows an example embodiment of one manner in which the network 1100 can be used in an initial configuration. In this initial configuration, the network user a) desires for optical communication to occur between nodes A and E, so that nodes A and E are end points of the communication, and b) desires for optical communication to occur between nodes A and C so that nodes A and C are the end points of the communication. The communication between end points including nodes A and E is called connection A-E, and the communication between end points including nodes A and C is called connection A-C. More generally, a connection is defined as two paired nodes which exchange information using dedicated wavelengths. Once two nodes exchange information using at least one dedicated wavelength, the node pair is considered to be an existing connection. For each connection, two paths can be established between the two end points. Thus, two connection paths can be established between node A and node E in the A-E connection, and two connection paths can be established between node A and node C in the A-C connection. One connection path for each connection is called the working path and the other connection path for each connection path is called the protection path. For example, as shown in Table 1, the working path of connection A-E is AE (meaning that the optical signals travel along the optical fiber cable traversing nodes A and E), while the protection path for connection A-E is path ABE (meaning that the optical signals travel along the optical fiber cable between nodes A and B and the optical fiber cable between nodes B and E). It should be understood, though, that more than two paths can be established for each connection. In addition, the network 1100 can be used to form other connections using any combination of two different nodes as end points of the connection.

From the transmit-source node of each connection, network traffic can be broadcasted along both the working and protection paths simultaneously. In connection A-E, one of the node A and the node E can be the transmit-source node and the other of the node A and the node E can be the receive-destination node, and in connection A-C, one of the node A and the node C can be the transmit-source node and the other of the node A and the node C can be the receive-destination node. At the receive-destination node of each connection, the receive-destination node selects the traffic from either the working path or the protection path. If there is a problem associated with one path of a connection (e.g., on one path, the signal is not transmitted from the transmit-source node to the receive-destination node, or the signal that is transmitted and received suffers an unacceptable loss in quality, such as an unacceptably high signal-to-noise ratio), the alternative path can be utilized. This can be accomplished by the receive-destination node monitoring the received signals and switching its selection of traffic from the path with the problems to the alternative path.

In one example embodiment, the connection between nodes A and E (connection A-E) can use five wavelengths, while the connection between nodes A and C (connection A-C) can use only one wavelength. But it should be understood that the network 1100 can be used in such a way that a larger or smaller number of wavelengths can be used in connection A-C and connection A-E. In this example embodiment, the connection between nodes A and E is established first, and then the connection between nodes A and C is established. But it should be understood that the network 1100 can be used in such a way that the connection A-C is established first, followed by the establishment of the connection A-E. In addition, in this example embodiment, wavelengths can be assigned in ascending numerical order (although they can be assigned instead in some other order, such as descending numerical order, a random order, etc.). Therefore, wavelengths λ1 to λ5 are first assigned to connection A-E, followed by the assignment of wavelength λ6 to connection A-C.

TABLE 2 Connection Working Path Protection Path Wavelengths Used A-E AE ABE λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, λ5 A-C ABC AEDC λ6

At some period of time after the initial connections shown above are established, a new connection, between nodes A and D (connection A-D) can be used, a connection that uses the bandwidth associated with two wavelengths (although the network 1100 can use any other connection between any other pair of nodes A-E as the new connection, and the new connection can use a bandwidth associated with more than or fewer than two wavelengths). Since in this example embodiment, the network 1100 supports only eight wavelengths, wavelengths λ1 to λ8, the only two wavelengths available to support the new connection are wavelengths λ7 and λ8. There are two paths available between nodes A and D (path ABCD, and path AED). However, path ABCD contains a NZDSF fiber link 1112 between nodes B and C. If wavelengths λ7 and λ8 are used on the fiber link between nodes B and C, then substantial four wave mixing effects may result, since wavelength λ6 is already present on link BC. In order to avoid substantial four wave mixing effects on link BC 1112 due to the presence of three consecutive wavelengths spaced 100 GHz apart (wavelengths λ6, λ7, and λ8), the two procedures discussed below can be used: wavelength reassignment, or wavelength translation. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment to use other procedures to accomplish this goal that perform the same or a similar function to the wavelength reassignment and wavelength translation procedures discussed below. Both of these procedures can be implemented by the control device that controls the inputting and/or processing of optical signals input into the ROADMs that comprise each node to increase the minimum frequency difference of optical signals transmitted from the ROADMs to the network.

Procedure 1: Wavelength Reassignment

In this procedure, the wavelengths of existing connections can be reassigned to new frequencies to increase the wavelength spacing between the three wavelengths transmitted over the NZDSF fiber link 1112. This procedure can result in the temporary disruption of optical traffic (e.g., optical signals) flowing on existing connections while the reassignment is taking place. However, in this procedure, the connections can be protected with an alternative path (as in this example embodiment), and as a result, the disruption in optical traffic is held to a minimum amount of time. In order to avoid substantial four wave mixing effects on link BC 1112, instead of using wavelengths λ6, λ7, and λ8 (which are spaced apart by 100 GHz) on link BC 1112, the new connection A-D can use wavelengths λ1 and λ8, thus resulting in wavelengths λ1, λ6, and λ8 on link BC 1112. This results in a wavelength spacing of 500 GHz between wavelengths λ1 and λ6, and a wavelength spacing of 200 GHz between wavelengths λ6 and λ8. However, it should be understood that the network 1100 can be configured to reassign other wavelengths as long as the resulting minimum wavelength spacing between various pairs of wavelengths transmitted along link BC 1112 is at least 200 GHz, as long as the wavelengths transmitted along the link BC 1112 are not adjacent wavelengths in the set of wavelengths λ1-λ8, or as long as the minimum wavelength spacing between various pairs of consecutive wavelengths transmitted along the link BC 1112 is increased.

In order to free up wavelength λ1 for connection A-D, optical traffic on wavelength λ1 associated with connection A-E can be first moved to wavelength λ7. This can be accomplished, for example, by:

1) configuring the element (or elements) in the node A that receives (or receive) and processes (or process) optical signals from other nodes to receive and process optical signals of wavelength λ1 only from node E along the AE path, or if this element (or these elements) are already so configured, maintaining such configuration;

2) configuring the element (or elements) in the node E that receives (or receive) and processes (or process) optical traffic from other nodes to receive and process optical signals of wavelength λ1 only from node A along the AE path, or if this element (or these elements) are already so configured, maintaining such configuration;

3) configuring or exchanging for a new element (or elements), the element (or elements) in node A that generates (or generate) and transmits (or transmit) optical signals of a particular wavelength on the ABE path so as to change the wavelength of optical signals generated and transmitted from node A to node E via the ABE path from λ1 to λ7;

4) configuring or exchanging for a new element (or elements), the element (or elements) in node E that generates (or generate) and transmits (or transmit) optical signals of a particular wavelength on the ABE path, so as to change the wavelength of optical signals generated and transmitted from node E to node A via the ABE path from λ1 to λ7;

5) configuring or exchanging for a new element (or elements), the element (or elements) in node B that passes (or pass) through or blocks from leaving the node B optical signals of a particular wavelength from one node to another so that the node B passes through optical signals of wavelength λ7 from node A to node E and from node E to node A, and blocks optical signals of wavelength λ1 that are received from node A from being passed through to node E and blocks optical signals of wavelength λ1 that are received from node E from being passed through to node A;

6) configuring the element (or elements) in the node A that previously received and processed optical signals of wavelength λ1 from node E along path AE to receive and process only optical signals of wavelength λ7 transmitted along the ABE path from node B, thereby resulting in a short interruption in communication in the A-E connection;

7) configuring the element (or elements) in the node E that previously received and processed optical signals of wavelength λ1 from node A along path AE to receive and process only optical signals of wavelength λ7 transmitted along the ABE path from node B, thereby resulting in a short interruption in communication in the A-E connection;

8) configuring or exchanging for a new element (or elements), the element (or elements) in node A that previously generated and transmitted optical signals of wavelength λ1 on the AE path so as to change the wavelength of optical signals generated and transmitted from node A to node E via the AE path from λ1 to λ7;

9) configuring or exchanging for a new element (or elements), the element (or elements) in node E that previously generated and transmitted optical signals of wavelength λ1 on the AE path so as to change the wavelength of optical signals generated and transmitted from node E to node A via the AE path from λ1 to λ7;

10) configuring the element (or elements) in node E that previously received and processed optical signals of wavelength λ1 from node A along the AE path and previously received and processed optical signals of wavelength λ7 from node B along the ABE path to receive and process optical signals of wavelength λ7 from node A along the AE path; and

11) configuring the element (or elements) in node A that previously received and processed optical signals of wavelength λ1 from node E along the AE path and previously received and processed optical signals of wavelength λ7 from node B along the ABE path to receive and process optical signals of wavelength λ7 from node E along the AE path.

Using Tunable Lasers & Colorless ROADMs to Perform Wavelength Reassignment

In one example embodiment, the combination of tunable lasers and colorless ROADMs can be used to easily perform wavelength reassignment. In this example embodiment, the control device that controls the inputting and/or processing of optical signals input into the ROADMs of each node to increase the minimum frequency difference of optical signals transmitted from the ROADMs can include such tunable lasers and the elements of the colorless ROADMs that are involved in the wavelength reassignment. Such an example embodiment can be applied to the network shown in FIG. 62, and any other network including the previously-discussed networks. Each node (A-E) in the network 1100 can comprise one or more colorless ROADMs, and all the transponders connected thereto can be tunable transponders, though they are not limited thereto. However, in this example embodiment, fewer than all of the nodes (for example, at least one node) can comprise one or more colorless ROADMs and fewer than all of the nodes (for example, at least one node) can include one or more tunable transponders. The colorless ROADMs can include, but are not limited to, any of the colorless ROADMs previously described herein. In addition, in this example embodiment, the colorless ROADMs and transponders can be replaced by another element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar function.

In this example embodiment, there can be a protected connection between nodes A and E whose associated protect paths are AE and ABE. However, the network 1100 can include other protected connections in addition to or instead of the connection between nodes A and E. The A-E connection can use four wavelengths, e.g., wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ4 can be assigned to this connection. But it should be understood that in this example embodiment, the A-E connection can use more than or fewer than four wavelengths, and that if four wavelengths are used, wavelengths other than wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ4 can be used. In addition, an additional connection can be made between nodes A and D, and this connection can use the bandwidth associated with four wavelengths (although this example embodiment is not limited to using four wavelength for the connection between nodes A and D and can use a different number of wavelengths). Since only wavelengths λ5, λ6, λ7, and λ8 are available for this connection, however, there is a problem, since placing wavelengths λ5, λ6, λ7, and λ8 on the NZDSF fiber between nodes C and B will result in four wave mixing effects.

In order to correct this problem, wavelengths λ2 and λ4 can first be replaced by wavelengths λ5 and λ7 in connection A-E. This can be accomplished by, for example:

1) configuring the external client receivers attached to the transponders of one of the colorless ROADMs in node E to listen to the traffic from node A using the path AE, and by configuring the external client receivers of one of the colorless ROADMs at node A to listen to the traffic from node E using the path AE. (Alternatively, external client receivers attached to transponders of other kinds of ROADMs or other types of optical elements in nodes E and A can be used to listen for traffic from nodes A and E, respectively);

2) retuning the two path ABE transponders (e.g., of a colorless ROADM) in node A that are sending traffic to node E via path ABE on wavelengths λ2 and λ4 to wavelengths λ5 and λ7, and retuning the two path ABE transponders (e.g., of a colorless ROADM) in node E that are sending traffic to node A via path ABE on wavelengths λ2 and λ4 to wavelengths λ5 and λ7;

3) configuring the node B to pass through the wavelengths λ5 and λ7 received at node B from node A to node E, and to block wavelengths λ2 and λ4 from being passed through to node E (by, for example, properly configuring an optical element such as a colorless ROADM in node B), and configuring node B to pass through wavelengths λ5 and λ7 received at node B from node E to node A, and to block the wavelengths λ2 and λ4 from being passed through to node A (by, for example, properly configuring an optical element such as a colorless ROADM in node B);

4) configuring the ROADM at node E that provides a line interface to node B to direct wavelengths λ5 and λ7 received from path ABE to the two path ABE transponders (e.g., of the ROADM that provides the line interface) in node E which were previously receiving wavelengths λ2 and λ4 from path ABE (in this embodiment the receivers in each of these transponders can be, but are not limited to, wide-band receivers, which can accept any isolated wavelength within the wavelength band associated with the ROADMs in the node E);

5) configuring the ROADM at node A that provides a line interface to node B to direct wavelengths λ5 and λ7 received from path ABE to the two path ABE transponders (e.g., of the ROADM that provides the line interface) in node A which were previously receiving wavelengths λ2 and λ4 from path ABE;

6) configuring the external client receivers attached to the transponders (e.g., of a colorless ROADM) at node E to listen to the traffic from the transponders associated with the ABE path, and configuring the external client receivers attached to the transponders at node A (e.g., of a colorless ROADM) to listen to the traffic from the transponders associated with the ABE path, thereby producing a short traffic interruption;

7) retuning the two path AE transponders (e.g., of a colorless ROADM) in nodes A and E associated with path AB, which are tuned to wavelengths λ2 and λ4, to wavelengths λ5 and λ7;

8) configuring the ROADM at node E that provides a line interface to node A to direct wavelengths λ5 and λ7 received from path AE to the two path AE transponders (e.g., of the ROADM that provides the line interface) in node E, which were previously receiving wavelengths λ2 and λ4 from path AE; and

9) configuring the ROADM at node A that provides a line interface to node E to direct wavelengths λ5 and λ7 received from path AE to the two path AE transponders (e.g., of the ROADM that provides the line interface) in node A, which were previously receiving wavelengths λ2 and λ4 from path AE.

It is within the scope of this example embodiment to use any other procedure to perform wavelength reassignment to reduce FWM effects by increasing the minimum spacing between wavelengths transmitted along the C-B connection. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment to replace the ROADMs and transponders with different optical elements that perform the same or similar functions.

At this point, the wavelength translation at nodes A and E is complete. Now wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, and λ7 are on links AB, BE, and AE. This wavelength reassignment allows wavelengths λ2, λ4, λ6, and λ8 to be used on connection A-D without causing substantial four wave mixing effects. Table 3 below summarizes the results of these processes.

TABLE 3 Resulting Wavelengths on Each Link Connection Link Link Link Link Link Link Scenario AB BC CD AE ED BE Prior to Connection λ1, λ2, λ1, λ2, λ1, λ2, A-D, and Prior to λ3, λ4 λ3, λ4 λ3, λ4 Rearrangement Prior to Connection λ1, λ3 λ1, λ3 λ1, λ3 A-D, and After to λ5, λ7 λ5, λ7 λ5, λ7 Rearrangement After Connection A-D λ1, λ3 λ5, λ2, λ4 λ2, λ4 λ1, λ3 λ5, λ2, λ4 λ1, λ3 λ7, λ2, λ4 λ6, λ8 λ6, λ8 λ7, λ2, λ4 λ6, λ8 λ5, λ7 λ6, λ8 λ6, λ8 Procedure 2: Wavelength Translation

In order to prevent any service disruptions in traffic, in one example embodiment, the wavelength translation procedure can be utilized. Wavelength translation can be accomplished by using the mechanism illustrated by FIG. 60, although it is not limited to the use of the FIG. 60 example embodiment, but can use any other mechanism or mechanisms that performs or perform the same or a similar function, such as, for example, the mechanism shown in the FIG. 61 example embodiment. Two example methodologies are discussed below that can be used to accomplish wavelength translation, although this example embodiment is not limited to the use of these two methodologies. In addition, these example methodologies can be used in the network 1100 shown in FIG. 62, through they are not limited thereto and can be applied to other networks, including the other networks previously discussed.

In the first example methodology, for the ABCD path of the network shown in FIG. 62, for example, 1) the traffic associated with the connection A-D can be sent between nodes A and B using wavelength λ7, 2) at node B, the node B is configured so that the wavelength λ7 can be converted to wavelength λ1 for optical signals transmitted from node B in the direction towards node D, and so that at node B, wavelength λ1 can be converted to wavelength λ7 for optical signals transmitted from node B in the direction towards node A (for example, using the configuration shown in FIG. 60), and 3) traffic can be then sent between nodes B and C using wavelength λ1. As a result, the wavelengths transmitted along fiber 1112 are wavelengths λ1, λ6, and λ8, thereby suppressing the power of the resulting four wave mixing products generated along the fiber 1112 between nodes B and C. Also in the first example methodology, for the AED path, traffic can then be sent between nodes A and D using only wavelength λ7 (no wavelength translation is performed). This is because, the optical fiber along the path AED does not include NZDSF optical fiber and does not generate four wave mixing cross products from λ6, λ7, and λ8 transmitted along path AED.

In the second example methodology, for the ABCD path of the network shown in FIG. 62, 1) the traffic associated with connection A-D can be sent between nodes A and B using wavelength λ7, 2) node B can be configured so that at node B wavelength λ7 can be converted to wavelength λ1 for optical signals transmitted from node B in the direction towards node D, and wavelength λ1 can be converted to wavelength λ7 for optical signals transmitted from node B in the direction towards node A (for example, using the configuration shown in FIG. 60), 3) the traffic can then be sent between nodes B and C using wavelength λ1, 4) node C can be configured so that at node C wavelength λ1 can be converted to wavelength λ7 for optical signals transmitted from node C in the direction towards node D, and wavelength λ7 can be converted to wavelength λ1 for optical signals transmitted from node C in the direction towards node A (for example, using the configuration shown in FIG. 60), and 5) traffic is then sent between nodes C and D using wavelength λ7. In the second example methodology, a given wavelength can be translated twice in both directions along the path ABCD in order to allow nodes A and D to transmit and receive the identical traffic using wavelength λ7 on both the AED path and the ABCD path. In contrast, in the first example methodology, node D can use two different wavelengths for the two different paths. It should be noted that node A (on both paths) can be configured to transmit and receive the connection A-D traffic on wavelength λ7 (and not wavelength λ1), because wavelength λ1 is already used for connection A-E on both paths away from node A.

Table 4 below illustrates the wavelengths on each of the links of FIG. 62 under procedure 1 and under the first and second example methodologies of procedure 2 discussed above.

TABLE 4 Resulting Wavelengths on Each Link Connection Link Link Link Link Link Link Scenario AB BC CD AE ED BE Prior to Connection λ1, λ2, λ6 λ6 λ1, λ2, λ6 λ1, λ2, A-D λ3, λ4, λ3, λ4, λ3, λ4, λ5, λ6 λ5, λ6 λ5 After Connection λ1, λ2, λ6, λ7, λ6, λ7, λ1, λ2, λ6, λ7, λ1, λ2, A-D, Prior to using λ3, λ4, λ8 λ8 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ3, λ4, Procedure 1 or 2 λ5, λ6, λ5, λ6, λ5 λ7, λ8 λ7, λ8 After Connection λ1, λ2, λ1, λ6, λ1, λ6, λ1, λ2, λ1, λ6, λ2, λ3, A-D, using Procedure 1 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ8 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ4, λ5, λ5, λ6, λ5, λ6, λ7 λ7, λ8 λ7, λ8 After Connection λ1, λ2, λ1, λ6, λ1, λ6, λ1, λ2, λ6, λ7, λ1, λ2, A-D, using Procedure 2 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ8 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ3, λ4, (Methodology 1) λ5, λ6, λ5, λ6, λ5 λ7, λ8 λ7, λ8 After Connection λ1, λ2, λ1, λ6, λ1, λ6, λ1, λ2, λ6, λ7, λ1, λ2, A-D, using Procedure 2 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ8 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ3, λ4, (Methodology 2) λ5, λ6, λ5, λ6, λ5 λ7, λ8 λ7, λ8 Intelligent Wavelength Assignment

Alternatively, rather than performing wavelength reassignment or translation as discussed above, another example embodiment can use what is called “intelligent wavelength assignment” as new connections are established. In intelligent wavelength assignment, the wavelengths initially set for each connection are selected to minimize or completely eliminate the need for the type of wavelength reassignment and wavelength translation discussed above. This intelligent wavelength assignment procedure can be used in the network 1100 shown in FIG. 62, and in other networks, such as the other previously discussed. In one example embodiment of intelligent wavelength assignment, where the wavelengths collectively assigned to the network 1100 in FIG. 62 can be represented as a set of different wavelength values, spaced apart by a predetermined amount, in consecutive, ascending order, the wavelengths are not assigned to each connection, as it is established, in ascending numerical order. Thus, in one example embodiment, the wavelengths collectively assigned to the network 1110 can be represented by the set (λ1=192.1 THz, λ2=192.2 THz, λ3=192.3 THz, λ4=192.4 THz, λ5=192.5 THz, λ6=192.6 THz, λ7=192.7 THz, and λ8=192.8 THz), where the predetermined wavelength spacing is 100 GHz. (It is within the scope of this example embodiment to use any other wavelength values and to use any other wavelength spacing). And, wavelengths can be assigned to node connections such that wavelengths corresponding to every other member of the set can be assigned to newly defined connections. For example, if the network 1100 supports eight wavelengths, λ1-λ8, the order of assignment to the different connections can be λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7, λ2, λ4, λ6, and λ8. This simple algorithm assigns all the odd members of the set in ascending numerical order of their wavelength values, followed by assigning all the even members of the set in ascending numerical order of their wavelength values. If the above procedure of wavelength assignment is performed in the previous example, there would have been no need to perform wavelength reassignment or wavelength translation when connection A-D was added to the network following the establishment of first connection A-E and then the establishment of connection A-C. For instance, if wavelengths corresponding to every odd member of the set are first assigned to connections followed by wavelengths corresponding to every even member of the set wavelength, the wavelengths assigned to the connection A-E are wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7, and λ2. When connection A-C is then established, the wavelength assigned to this connection can then be wavelength λ4. This would leave wavelengths λ6 and λ8 for connection A-D, resulting in wavelengths λ4, λ6, λ8 residing on link BC (which contains the NZDSF).

The above algorithm may avoid some amount of wavelength reassignment, but it is not optimized, and it can easily fail depending upon the order of connection establishment. For example, assume the above algorithm was to be used and the order of connection establishment based upon traffic demands was as follows: three wavelengths to connection A-E, one wavelength for connection A-C, two wavelengths to connection A-E, followed by two wavelengths to connection A-D. The wavelengths on each link after each connection are shown in the table below. As can be seen, the simple odd-wavelengths-followed-by-even-wavelengths wavelength assignment algorithm fails in this case, since, as shown in Table 5 below, three consecutive wavelengths end up on link BC (the NZDSF link).

TABLE 5 Number of New Resulting Wavelengths on Each Link Connection Wavelengths Wavelengths Link Link Link Link Link Link Order Connection Needed Assigned AB BC CD AE ED BE 1 A-E 3 λ1, λ3, λ1, λ3, λ1, λ3, λ1, λ3, λ5 λ5 λ5 λ5 2 A-C 1 λ7 λ1, λ3, λ7 λ7 λ1, λ3, λ7 λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7 λ5, λ7 λ5, 3 A-E 2 λ2, λ4 λ1, λ3, λ5, λ7 λ7 λ1, λ3, λ7 λ1, λ3, λ7, λ2, λ4 λ5, λ7, λ5, λ2, λ2, λ4 λ4 4 A-D 2 λ6, λ8 λ1, λ2, λ3, λ6, λ7, λ6, λ7, λ1, λ2, λ6, λ7, λ1, λ2, λ4, λ5, λ6, λ8 λ8 λ3, λ4, λ8 λ3, λ4, λ7, λ8 λ5, λ6, λ5 λ7, λ8

A more intelligent wavelength assignment algorithm can reduce the amount of wavelength reassignment and/or wavelength translation. This wavelength assignment can be performed by the control device that controls the inputting and/or processing of optical signals input into the ROADMs of each node to increase the minimum frequency difference of optical signals transmitted from the ROADMs to the other nodes and to the network. One such algorithm, referred to as the “Link Capacity Maximization Algorithm”, is explained below.

For this algorithm, the fundamental rules when assigning a new wavelength in a network to a new or existing connection can be as follows, but are not limited thereto:

-   -   1. Assign a wavelength such that, following the assignment, the         number of remaining wavelengths that are available to be         assigned to any existing connections containing one or more         NZDSF or DSF links is maximized.     -   2. Assign a wavelength such that, following the assignment, the         number of remaining wavelengths that are available to be         assigned to a new “future” connection containing one or more         NZDSF or DSF links is maximized.     -   3. Assign a wavelength such that, on links containing NZDSF or         DSF fibers, all wavelengths are spaced apart by at least 200 GHZ         where the wavelength spacing between adjacent wavelengths is 100         GHz and more generally, on links containing NZDSF or DSF fibers,         all the wavelengths are spaced apart by at least twice the         wavelength spacing between adjacent wavelengths.

In assigning wavelengths, in one example embodiment, an attempt is made to satisfy all three rules simultaneously. In addition to the above rules, when establishing a new connection between two end points (whether the connection contains one or two paths), one example embodiment always avoids routing wavelengths over NZDSF or DSF links if possible.

In order to illustrate the operation of the “Link Capacity Maximization Algorithm”, the algorithm will be applied to the problematic connection scenario previously discussed. As before, for this scenario, three wavelengths are first assigned to connection A-E, followed by one wavelength to connection A-C, followed by two wavelengths to connection A-E, and followed by two wavelengths to connection A-D. But it should be understood that this algorithm can be applied to any other connection scenario for the network 1100 shown in FIG. 62 and to any other connection scenario on any other network, including any of the networks previously discussed.

1st Connection Procedure:

At the start, since there are no existing connections containing NZDSF or DSF links, and since the new connection A-E does not contain any NZDSF or DSF links, only rule 2 applies. In order to satisfy rule 2, it can be shown that all the following wavelength sets can be assigned to connection A-E: (λ1, λ3, λ5), (λ3, λ5, λ7), (λ2, λ4, λ6), or (λ4, λ6, λ8), or any combination of three odd wavelengths, or any combination of three even wavelengths. Regardless of which of these sets is chosen, in all cases, the maximum number of wavelengths available for a new future connection containing an NZDSF or DSF fiber link is equal to four. For example, assume wavelengths λ1, λ3, and λ5 are assigned to connection A-E. If a new connection containing an NZDSF or DSF fiber link is then established, then for this new connection, wavelengths λ2, λ4, λ6, and λ8 can be assigned to this new connection. For simplicity, the set containing the lowest numbered wavelengths, set (λ1, λ3, λ5), is chosen in this connection procedure.

2^(nd) Connection Procedure:

After the first three wavelengths are assigned to connection A-E, a single wavelength needs to be assigned to the new connection A-C. Now all three rules apply. In order to satisfy rules 1 and 3, the wavelength assigned to the A-C connection can be either wavelength λ2, λ4, λ6, or λ8. Regardless of which of these wavelengths is assigned to the connection, the maximum number of wavelengths that will be available to this connection after the assignment is three wavelengths. In addition, regardless of which of the wavelengths λ2, λ4, λ6, or λ8 is assigned to the connection, the maximum number of wavelengths that will be available to a new future connection containing one or more NZDSF or DSF links after the assignment is 3. For simplicity, the lowest numbered wavelengths, λ2, is chosen in this connection procedure.

3^(rd) Connection Procedure:

After the first four wavelengths are assigned, two wavelengths need to be assigned to the existing connection A-E. All three rules apply. In order to satisfy rules 1 and 3, it can be shown that all the following wavelength sets can be assigned to connection A-E: (λ7, λ4), (λ7, λ6), or (λ7, λ8). Regardless of which of these wavelength sets is assigned to the connection, the maximum number of wavelengths that will be available to the existing connection A-C (containing an NZDSF link) after the assignment is two wavelengths. In addition, regardless of which of the wavelength sets is assigned to the connection A-E, the maximum number of wavelengths that will be available to a new future connection containing one or more NZDSF or DSF links after the assignment is also equal to two wavelengths. For simplicity, the set containing the lowest numbered wavelengths, set (λ7, λ4), is chosen in this connection procedure.

4^(th) Connection Procedure:

After the first six wavelengths are assigned, two wavelengths need to be assigned to the new connection A-D. At this point only wavelengths λ6 and λ8 are available. Therefore, these two wavelengths are assigned to connection A-D. This results in wavelengths λ2, λ6, and λ8 residing on the NZDSF link BC, which are all separated from one another by at least 200 GHz. The assignment of wavelengths at each procedure and the resulting wavelengths on each link are summarized in Table 6 below.

TABLE 6 Number of New Resulting Wavelengths on Each Link Connection Wavelengths Wavelengths Link Link Link Link Link Link procedure Connection Needed Assigned AB BC CD AE ED BE 1 A-E 3 λ1, λ3, λ1, λ3, λ1, λ3, λ1, λ3, λ5 λ5, λ5 λ5 2 A-C 1 λ2 λ1, λ3, λ2 λ2 λ1, λ3, λ2 λ1, λ3, λ5, λ2 λ5, λ2 λ5, 3 A-E 2 λ7, λ4 λ1, λ3, λ5, λ2 λ2 λ1, λ3, λ5, λ2 λ1, 3λ, λ2, λ4, λ7 λ2, λ7, λ7 λ5, λ4, 7λ 4 A-D 2 λ6, λ8 λ1, λ3, λ5, λ2, λ6, λ2, λ6, λ1, λ3, λ5, λ2, λ6, λ1, λ2, λ3, λ2, λ4, λ7, λ8 λ8 λ2, λ4, λ7, λ8 λ4, λ5 λ6, λ8 λ6, λ8 Fast Reroute After Link Failure Using Colorless ROADMs

In another example embodiment, when colorless ROADMs (i.e., ROADMs with colorless add/drop ports) are used within a network, (such as any of the networks shown in the previous figures), one or more transponders in a node can be configured to perform wavelength translation during a “fast reroute” of traffic following a link failure. A fast reroute of traffic is a rerouting of signals from one path between two nodes to another path between those two nodes in which no human intervention is needed so that the network itself detects the link failure and automatically reconfigures the affected nodes and their optical elements so that the optical signals are rerouted away from the failed link to other node links to restore the connection between the two nodes. FIGS. 63A and 63B show a network 1200. Network 1200 can include colorless ROADMs, other type of ROADMs, and other types of optical elements. The colorless ROADMs and other types of ROADMs used in the network 1200 can be the same as or different from the ROADMs illustrated in FIGS. 8-20, 26, 28-30, 32-58, and 59A-59H, 60, and 61. Further, it is within the scope of this example embodiment to replace the colorless ROADMs used in the nodes in the network 1200 with an element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar functions thereof. It is further within the scope of this example embodiment for the network 1200 to be the same as or different from the network 1100 shown in FIG. 62.

The network 1200 contains five optical add/drop nodes: node 1202 (node A), node 1204 (node B), node 1206 (node C), node 1208 (node D), and node 1210 (node E). But it should be understood that network 1200 is not limited to this number of nodes and can contain more than or fewer than five optical add/drop nodes. In addition, nodes A-E can be the same as or different from the nodes A-E shown in FIG. 62. Moreover, these nodes A-E can contain one or more of the example ROADMs shown in FIGS. 8-20, 26, 28-30, 32-58, 59A-59H, 60, and 61, any element or elements that performs or perform the same or similar functions, and/or other optical functions. Nodes A, C, and D can be constructed as two degree ROADM nodes (each of which can be connected to two other nodes), while nodes B and E can be constructed as three degree ROADM nodes (each of which can be connected to three other nodes). But ROADM nodes A, C, and D are not limited to being two degree ROADM nodes and can also be ROADM nodes of other degrees. Similarly, ROADM nodes B and E are not limited to being three degree ROADM nodes and can also be ROADM nodes of other degrees. The nodes A-E can be connected to each other by bidirectional optical fiber link pairs. Each pair is depicted in FIGS. 63A and 63B as a single line between nodes. The link pairs between nodes are denoted as follows: the link between nodes A and B is denoted as link 1212; the link between nodes B and C is denoted as link 1214; the link between nodes C and D is denoted as link 1216; the link between nodes D and E is denoted as link 1218; the link between nodes E and A is denoted as link 1220; and the link between nodes E and B is denoted as link 1222. The bidirectional fiber link pair 1214 between nodes B and C can be constructed using a Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber (NZDSF), which can cause FWM when a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths is transmitted therealong. The bidirectional fiber link pairs (1212, 1216, 1218, 1220, and 1222) between all other nodes can use SMF-28 fiber, which does not cause FWM when a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths is transmitted therealong. But, the bidirectional fiber link pair 1214 between nodes B and C can also be constructed using other types of optic fiber cable besides (NZDSF), and the bidirectional fiber link pairs between all other nodes (1212, 1216, 1218, 1220, and 1222) can use other types of optical fiber cables besides SMF-28 fiber. In addition, the fiber optic cable linking any of the nodes is not limited to bidirectional fiber link pairs and can be a unidirectional cable.

In the network 1200, the ROADMs in each node can support optical signals of eight wavelengths (denoted as λ1 through λ8 and including a set of monotonically increasing wavelength values, where two consecutive members of the set are called adjacent wavelengths or adjacent wavelength values, and optical signals of two adjacent wavelengths are denoted as adjacent optical signals). But it is also within the scope of this example embodiment for each ROADM in the network 1200 to support optical signals of more than or fewer than eight wavelengths. The supported eight wavelengths can be spaced apart by 100 GHz. For example, wavelength Pi can utilize the frequency 192.1 THz, wavelength λ2 can utilize the frequency 192.2 THz, wavelength λ3 can utilize the frequency 192.3 THz, wavelength λ4 can utilize the frequency 192.4 THz, wavelength λ5 can utilize the frequency 192.5 THz, wavelength λ6 can utilize the frequency 192.6 THz, wavelength λ7 can utilize the frequency 192.71 THz, and wavelength λ8 can utilize the frequency 192.8 THz. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the ROADMs in the network 1200 to support optical signals with wavelengths spaced apart by more than or less than 100 GHz, and for the wavelengths to take on values other than 192.1 THz-192.8 THz. In addition, it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the wavelengths λ1 through λ8 to be the same as or different from the wavelengths λ1 through λ8 in the FIG. 62 example embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, there can be a protected connection between nodes A and E, which uses protected paths ABE and AE. (It is within the scope of this example embodiment for other node connections to be protected connections and for the connection between nodes A and E not to be a protected connection.) Also in this example embodiment, the wavelengths used over the two protected paths ABE and AE can be wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5, where wavelengths λ1 and λ2, as well as wavelengths λ2 and λ3 are separated by 100 GHz, while the wavelengths in wavelength pairs λ3 and λ5 and in wavelength pairs λ1 and λ3 are separated by 200 GHz. (It is within the scope of this example embodiment for different wavelengths than those previously discussed to be used over the protected paths ABE and AE, and for the wavelength spacing between adjacent wavelengths to be different than 100 GHz.)

FIGS. 63A and 63B show the situation where the link between nodes B and E fails. As shown in FIG. 63A, the symbols λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 are positioned adjacent only the links 1220, 1212, and 1222, signifying that wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 assigned to be transmitted between nodes A and E, between nodes A and B, and between nodes B and E. In order to establish a new protection path after the BE link failure, the network can be designed so that it automatically reconfigures itself so that the new protection path becomes ABCDE, as shown in FIG. 63B. This reconfiguration is shown by a listing of the wavelengths carried on the links between these nodes. Node E is automatically reconfigured so that at node E, all wavelengths that were previously received/sent on the line interface towards node B can now be received/sent on the line interface towards node D. Since consecutive wavelengths λ1, λ2, and λ3 cannot be placed on link BC due to the fact that it is an NZDSF fiber link, a transponder can be used at node B to translate wavelength λ2 to wavelength λ7 for optical signals transmitted from node B to node C, and a transponder can be used in node C to translate wavelength λ2 to wavelength λ7 for optical signals transmitted from node C to node B. Prior to the fault on link BE, the translation transponders can be put in place and properly connected so that in the event of a BE link failure, a fast reroute (without human intervention) can occur. Thus, as shown in FIG. 63B, wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 are transmitted between nodes A and B, and wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, and λ7 are transmitted between nodes B and C, wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 are transmitted between nodes C and D, wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 are transmitted between nodes D and E, and wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 are transmitted between nodes E and A.

The details of the optical elements that can perform the wavelength translation at node B are illustrated in FIG. 64. The node B in FIG. 64 is denoted by reference numeral 1300 and can comprise three 3-degree colorless ROADMs including North ROADM 1310, West ROADM 1320, and East ROADM 1330 (no amplifiers are shown, but they can be included). It should be understood that it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the node B to include other elements in addition to those shown in FIG. 64. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment for the ROADMs shown in FIG. 64 to be replaced by other ROADMs or optical elements that perform the same or similar functions. In addition, the colorless ROADMs shown in FIG. 64 can be the same or different from the colorless ROADMs previously shown in other figures. In addition, while the ROADMs 1310, 1320, and 1330 are shown to be the same type of ROADMs, this example embodiment is not limited thereto and can encompass a node B in which the ROADMs 1310, 1320, and 1330 are different from each other.

The North ROADM 1310 can comprise a north interface 1312 through which optical signals are transmitted to and received from Node E, a line interface 1314 through optical signals are transmitted to and received from the north interface 1312, express ports 1316, through one of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1326 of the West ROADM 1320 and through the other of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1336 of the East ROADM 1330, and k add/drop ports 1318, where k is an integer. The West ROADM 1320 can comprise a west interface 1322 through which optical signals are transmitted to and received from Node C, a line interface 1324 through optical signals are transmitted to and received from the west interface 1322, express ports 1326, through one of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1316 of the North ROADM 1310 and through the other of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1336 of the East ROADM 1330, and k add/drop ports 1328, where k is an integer. The East ROADM 1330 can comprise an east interface 1332 through which optical signals are transmitted to and received from Node A, a line interface 1334 through optical signals are transmitted to and received from the east interface 1332, express ports 1336, through one of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to an express port of the West ROADM 1320 and through the other of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to an express port of the North ROADM 1310, and k add/drop ports 1338, where k is an integer. The express ports of each ROADM are can collectively be called an express interface.

As shown in FIG. 64, wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can arrive on the East interface of the node B 1300, and prior to the failure of link BE, all four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can be passed from one of the express ports 1336 on the East ROADM 1330 to the express ports 1316, and then these four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can be forwarded out the North interface 1312 via the North ROADM 1310 to the node E. Similarly, in the North to East direction, wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 arrive on the North interface 1312 of the node B 1300, and prior to the failure of link BE, all four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can be passed from the express ports 1316 on the North ROADM 1310 to the express ports 1336 on the East ROADM 1330, and then the four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 are forwarded out the East interface 1332 via the East ROADM 1330 to node A. Following the detection of the failure of fiber link BE, wavelengths λ1, λ3, and λ5 can be redirected to the West ROADM 1320 from the East ROADM 1330 via the express ports 1336 and 1326 connected to the East ROADM 1330 and the West ROADM 1320, respectively (as shown in FIG. 64). Simultaneously (as shown in FIG. 64), the East ROADM 1330 can route the wavelength λ2 through one of the drop ports 1338 down to a transponder 1340 (also denoted as 1E), which is already in place in anticipation of the failure of link BE. Transponder 1340 can convert wavelength λ2 to a non-colored optical signal (white light) and the signal can be forwarded from the transponder 1E 1340 to a transponder 1342 (also denoted as 1W), where the non-colored optical signal is converted to wavelength λ7 and transmitted into the West ROADM 1320 via one of its add ports 1328 (as shown in FIG. 64). The West ROADM 1320 then can combine wavelength λ7 from the transponder 1342 with wavelengths λ1, λ3, and λ5 received from the East ROADM 1330, and then can direct all four wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, and λ7 to the west interface 1322 of the node B 300 (as shown in FIG. 64). A similar set of actions occurs in the West to East direction in node B 1300. The two translation transponders 1E and 1W need not be tunable transponders, since the frequencies of the two transponders are known prior to the failure of link BE. In addition, the two transponders 1E and 1W can be connected to the add/drop ports 1338 and 1328 of the ROADMs 1330 and 1320, respectively, via direct optical fiber connections, although it is within the scope of this example embodiment to use any other type of connection between the ROADMs 1330 and 1320 and the transponders 1E and 1W.

For example, instead of using direct fiber connections between the transponders 1E and 1W and the ROADMs, as shown in FIG. 64, an automated M×M optical switch can be used, as shown in FIG. 65. FIG. 65 shows a network 1400, which can be different from or the same as the network 1300 shown in FIG. 64, except for the replacement of a direct optical fiber connection between the transponders and the East and West ROADMs. The node B in FIG. 65 is denoted by reference numeral 1400 and connects to other nodes A, C, and E, which can be the same as or different from the nodes A, C, and E shown in FIGS. 62, 63A, and 63B. The node 1400 can comprise three 3-degree colorless ROADMs including North ROADM 1410, West ROADM 1420, and East ROADM 1430 (no amplifiers are shown, but they can be included). It should be understood that it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the node 1400 to include other elements in addition to those shown in FIG. 65. It is also within the scope of this example embodiment for the ROADMs shown in FIG. 65 to be replaced by other ROADMs or optical elements that perform the same or similar functions. In addition, the colorless ROADMs shown in FIG. 65 can be the same or different from the colorless ROADMs previously shown in other figures. In addition, while the ROADMs 1410, 1420, and 1430 are shown to be the same type of ROADMs, this example embodiment is not limited thereto and can encompass a node B in which the ROADMs 1410, 1420, and 1430 are different from each other.

The North ROADM 1410 can comprise a north interface 1412 through which optical signals are transmitted to and received from Node E, a line interface 1414 through optical signals are transmitted to and received from the north interface 1412, express ports 1416, through one of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1426 of the West ROADM 1420 and through the other of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1436 of the East ROADM 1430, and k add/drop ports 1418, where k is an integer. The West ROADM 1420 can comprise a west interface 1422 through which optical signals are transmitted to and received from Node C, a line interface 1424 through optical signals are transmitted to and received from the west interface 1422, express ports 1426, through one of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1416 of the North ROADM 1410 and through the other of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to one of the express ports 1436 of the East ROADM 1430, and k add/drop ports 1428, where k is an integer. The East ROADM 1430 can comprise an east interface 1432 through which optical signals are transmitted to and received from Node A, a line interface 1434 through optical signals are transmitted to and received from the east interface 1432, express ports 1436, through one of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to an express port of the West ROADM 1420 and through the other of which optical signals are received from and transmitted to an express port of the North ROADM 1410, and k add/drop ports 1438, where k is an integer. The express ports of each ROADM are can collectively be called an express interface.

As shown in FIG. 65, wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can arrive on the East interface of the node B 1400, and prior to the failure of link BE, all four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can be passed from one of the express ports 1436 on the East ROADM 1430 to the express ports 1416, and then these four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can be forwarded out the North interface 1412 via the North ROADM 1410 to the node E. Similarly, in the North to East direction, wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 arrive on the North interface 1412 of the node B 1400, and prior to the failure of link BE, all four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 can be passed from the express ports 1416 on the North ROADM 1410 to the express ports 1436 on the East ROADM 1430, and then the four wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, and λ5 are forwarded out the East interface 1432 via the East ROADM 1430 to node A. Following the detection of the failure of fiber link BE, wavelengths λ1, λ3, and λ5 can be redirected to the West ROADM 1420 from the East ROADM 1430 via the express ports 1436 and 1426 connected to the East ROADM 1430 and the West ROADM 1420, respectively. Simultaneously, the East ROADM 1430 can route the wavelength λ2 through one of the drop ports 1438 down to a transponder 1440 (also denoted as 1E), which is already in place in anticipation of the failure of link BE. Transponder 1440 can convert wavelength λ2 to a non-colored optical signal (white light) and the signal can be forwarded from the transponder 1E 1440 to a transponder 1442 (also denoted as 1W), where the non-colored optical signal is converted to wavelength λ7, which is then input into the West ROADM 1420 via one of the add ports 1428. The West ROADM 1420 then can combine wavelength λ7 from the transponder 1442 with wavelengths λ1, λ3, and λ5 received from the East ROADM 1430, and then can direct all four wavelengths λ1, λ3, λ5, and λ7 to the west interface 1422 of the node B 1400. A similar set of actions occurs in the West to East direction in node B 1400. The two translation transponders 1E and 1W need not be tunable transponders, since the frequencies of the two transponders are known prior to the failure of link BE.

The two transponders 1E and 1W can be connected to the add/drop ports 1438 and 1428 of the ROADMs 1430 and 1420, respectively, via an automated M×M optical switch 1444. The automated M×M optical switch 1444 can route optical signals between the ROADMs 1420 and 1430 and the transponders 1440 and 1442 once the failed link BE is detected by the node 1400. In addition, although not shown, fiber optic cables can route optical signals from the add/drop ports 1418 of the North ROADM 1410 to the M×M optical switch 1444. The node 1400 can be configured so that the automated M×M optical switch 1444 can be used to allow the translation transponders 1440 and 1442 to be used for wavelength translations between any of the three ROADMs 1410, 1420, and 1430 in the node, depending upon various possible failure scenarios. In this example embodiment, the translation transponders 1440 and 1442 can be tunable to any of the wavelength frequencies supported by the ROADMs 1410, 1420, and 1430. Thus the FIG. 65 configuration adds additional flexibility.

Using Multiple Degrees Per Link

According to another example embodiment, multiple optical fibers can be used to connect network nodes, and multi-degree ROADMs can be used within the network nodes. This example embodiment provides another solution to prevent four-wave mixing on NZDSF and DSF fiber types by connecting the multi-degree ROADMs on the ends of a NZDSF or DSF fiber link using four fibers including two bidirectional pairs of optical fibers (instead of one bidirectional pair of optical fibers, as in the FIG. 62 example embodiment). In such an example embodiment, the control device that controls the inputting and/or processing of optical signals input into the ROADMs of each node to increase the minimum frequency difference of optical signals transmitted from the ROADMs to the other nodes and to the network can include these four fibers. For this example embodiment, two degrees (i.e., two network interfaces) on each ROADM node of a pair of ROADM nodes can be used to connect the two ROADM nodes together using the four NZDSF or DSF fibers (i.e., two bidirectional fiber pairs). The node can be configured so that odd wavelengths can be transmitted on one bidirectional fiber pair, and even wavelengths can be transmitted on the other bidirectional fiber pair. Such an arrangement is illustrated in FIGS. 66A and 66B, where two protected paths can be established for every connection. In the example embodiments shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, the ROADMs support eight consecutive wavelengths, each spaced apart by 100 GHz. But it is within the scope of these example embodiments for the ROADMs to support more than or fewer than eight consecutive wavelengths and it is within the scope of these example embodiments for the consecutive wavelengths to be spaced apart by more than or less than 100 GHz.

FIGS. 66A and 66B show a network 1500 including five optical add/drop nodes: node 1510 (node A), node 1512 (node B), node 1514 (node C), node 1516 (node D), and node 1518 (node E). But it should be understood that network 1500 is not limited to this number of nodes and can contain more than or fewer than five optical add/drop nodes. Moreover, these nodes A-E can contain one or more of the example ROADMs shown in FIGS. 8-20, 26, 28-30, 32-58, 59A-59H, 60, 61, 64, and 65, any element or elements that performs or perform the same or similar functions, and/or other optical functions. Nodes A and D can be constructed as two degree ROADM nodes (each of which can be connected to two other nodes), while nodes C and E can be constructed as three degree ROADM nodes (each of which can be connected to three other nodes), while node B can be constructed as a four degree ROADM node. But ROADM nodes A and D are not limited to being two degree ROADM nodes and can also be ROADM nodes of other degrees. Similarly, ROADM nodes B and E are not limited to being three degree ROADM nodes and can also be ROADM nodes of other degrees, and the ROADM node B is not limited to being a four degree ROADM node. The nodes A and B are connected by one bidirectional optical fiber link pair 1520. The nodes B and C are connected by two bidirectional optical fiber link pairs 1522 and 1523. The nodes C and D are connected by one bidirectional optical fiber link pair 1524. The nodes D and E are connected by one bidirectional optical fiber link pair 1526. The nodes E and A are connected by one bidirectional optical fiber link pair 1528. The nodes E and B are connected by one bidirectional optical fiber link pair 1530. Each bidirectional optical fiber pair is depicted in FIG. 66A as a single line between nodes. The bidirectional fiber link pairs 1522 1523 between nodes B and C can be constructed using a Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber (NZDSF), which can cause FWM when a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths is transmitted therealong. The bidirectional fiber link pairs (1520, 1524, 1526, 1528, and 1530) between all other nodes can use SMF-28 fiber, which does not cause FWM when a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths is transmitted therealong. But, the bidirectional fiber link pairs 1522 between nodes B and C can also be constructed using other types of optic fiber cable besides (NZDSF), and the bidirectional fiber link pairs (1520, 1524, 1526, 1528, and 1530) between all other nodes can use other types of optical fiber cables besides SMF-28 fiber. In addition, the fiber optic cable linking any of the nodes is not limited to bidirectional fiber link pairs and can be other types of cable.

In the network 1500, the ROADMs in each node can support optical signals of eight wavelengths (denoted as λ1 through λ8 and including a set of monotonically increasing wavelength values, where two consecutive members of the set are called adjacent wavelengths or adjacent wavelength values, and optical signals of two adjacent wavelengths are denoted as adjacent optical signals). But it is also within the scope of this example embodiment for each ROADM in the network 1500 to support optical signals of more than or fewer than eight wavelengths. As noted above, the supported eight wavelengths can be spaced apart by 100 GHz. For example, wavelength λ1 can utilize the frequency 192.1 THz, wavelength λ2 can utilize the frequency 192.2 THz, wavelength λ3 can utilize the frequency 192.3 THz, wavelength λ4 can utilize the frequency 192.4 THz, wavelength λ5 can utilize the frequency 192.5 THz, wavelength λ6 can utilize the frequency 192.6 THz, wavelength λ7 can utilize the frequency 192.71 THz, and wavelength λ8 can utilize the frequency 192.8 THz. But it is within the scope of this example embodiment for the ROADMs in the network 1500 to support optical signals with wavelengths spaced apart by more than or less than 100 GHz, and for the wavelengths to take on values other than 192.1 THz-192.8 THz.

In FIGS. 66A and 66B, there can be two connections initially: connection A-E and connection A-C. Connection A-E can use five wavelengths (wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4, and λ5), while wavelength λ6 is used for connection A-C. Assume now that an additional connection, connection A-D, is to be established, and assume two wavelengths will be used on the A-D connection. Only wavelengths λ7 and λ8 are available, so these wavelengths are used to establish the new connection A-D. In order to prevent four wave mixing on the fibers between nodes B and C, wavelength λ8 can be placed on the fiber pair 1522 containing wavelength λ6, while wavelength λ7 can be placed on the other fiber pair 1523 running between the two ROADMs in the two nodes B and C. In the B to C direction, Node B can receive all eight wavelengths, and the ROADMs in node B can route wavelengths λ6 and λ8 to the upper fiber pair 1522 shown in FIG. 66B going to Node C, and the ROADMs in node B can route wavelength λ7 to the lower fiber pair 1523 shown in FIG. 66B going to Node C. The ROADMs in node C can receive wavelengths λ6, λ7, and λ8 from the two separate fiber pairs and combine the three wavelengths onto the single fiber pair going to node D. A similar set of operations occurs in the C to B direction.

FWM Suppressing Procedures

FIGS. 67-69 show three example embodiments of some of the procedures noted above that are performed in a ROADM or other optical element (or elements) performing the same or similar function, a node, and/or a network. In FIG. 67, block 1600 denotes a procedure for inputting optical signals of at least three wavelengths with a first predetermined wavelength spacing between each pair of adjacent wavelengths into any of the previously-discussed ROADMs when the ROADM is in a first configuration. Next, in block 1610 the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the node of which the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) is a part, the network of which the node is a part, the user of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the user of the node, or the user of the network decides whether to reduce the power of FWM cross products that are generated when multiplexed optical signals of at least three wavelengths are transmitted from the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) to an optical fiber that generates FWM cross products from multiplexed optical signals of at least three wavelengths. If the answer is no, the procedure of block 1620 is performed. This procedure outputs a multiplexed optical signal or signals of at least three wavelengths with the first predetermined wavelength spacing between each pair of adjacent wavelengths. If the answer is yes, the procedure of blocks 1630 or 1640 (or both 1630 and 1640) are performed. In block 1630, a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths with a second predetermined wavelength spacing larger than the first wavelength spacing between each pair of adjacent wavelengths is output from the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) in response to the inputting of optical signals of different wavelengths into the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) in a second configuration. In block 1640, a multiplexed optical signal of at least three wavelengths is output from the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) so that for at least two pairs of adjacent wavelengths, the center wavelength difference of one pair of adjacent wavelengths is different than the center wavelength difference of the other pair of adjacent wavelengths, producing an unequal wavelength spacing. When outputted multiplexed optical signals from the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) in the first configuration are inputted (as a result of the procedure of block 1620) into a fiber optic cable capable of producing four wave mixing products as a result of the interaction of the outputted multiplexed optical signals with each other inside the fiber optic cable, FWM occurs. But the power of the four wave mixing cross products is reduced (as a result of the procedure of block 1630 or 1640) by changing the configuration of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) from the first configuration to the second configuration, which changes the wavelength spacing from the first to the second predetermined wavelength spacing or by making the wavelength spacing of the output optical signals unequal. This unequal wavelength-spacing procedure in block 1640 can be the same as or different from the example embodiment discussed in connection with above-discussed Table 1. In addition, the wavelength-spacing-change procedure in block 1630 can be the same as or different from the wavelength-spacing-change procedure discussed above in connection with any of FIGS. 60-65, 66A, and 66B.

FIG. 68 shows one example embodiment of a procedure for performing the unequal-wavelength spacing procedure and the wavelength-spacing-change procedure shown in FIG. 67. In block 1700, optical signals of at least three different wavelengths are added at K different add ports of the ROADM or other optical element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar function in the first configuration with a first predetermined wavelength spacing, where K is an integer. Next, in block 1710, the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the node of which the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) is a part, the network of which the node is a part, the user of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the user of the node, or the user of the network decides whether to reduce the power of FWM cross products that are generated when multiplexed optical signals of at least three wavelengths are transmitted from the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) to an optical fiber that generates FWM cross products from multiplexed optical signals of at least three wavelengths. If the answer is no, then block 1720 follows, in which multiplexed optical signals of at least three wavelengths are output with the first predetermined wavelength spacing in the first configuration of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements). If the answer is yes, then blocks 1730, 1750, or 1770 follow (or any two or three of the procedures found in blocks 1730, 1750, and 1770 can be used). In block 1730, optical signals of different wavelengths, with a second predetermined wavelength spacing greater than the first predetermined wavelength spacing, are added at L different add ports of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) in a second configuration thereof, where L is an integer less than K. Block 1740 follows block 1730, and in block 1740, the optical signals added at the L different add ports with the second predetermined wavelength spacing in the second configuration of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) are outputted from the ROADM (or other optical element or elements). In block 1750, optical signals of at least three different wavelengths are added at different add ports of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) so that for at least two pairs of adjacent wavelengths of the optical signals added at the add ports, the center wavelength difference of one pair of adjacent wavelengths is different than the center wavelength difference of the other pair of adjacent wavelengths. Block 1760 follows block 1750, and in block 1760 the optical signals added at the different add ports with unequal wavelength spacing are output as a multiplexed optical signal so that the center wavelength difference of one pair of adjacent wavelengths thereof is different than the center wavelength difference of the other pair of adjacent wavelengths thereof. In block 1770, optical signals are inputted into the ROADM and one or more of the wavelengths within the optical signals are changed by one or more wavelength-changing elements so that the multiplexed optical signal output from the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) in block 1780 has the second predetermined wavelength spacing.

FIG. 69 shows another example embodiment of a procedure in which the wavelengths that are supported by the nodes of a network and the ROADMs (or other optical element or elements) in the nodes are assigned to different pairs of node connections to suppress FWM. This wavelength-node-connection assignment can be the same as or different from the wavelength-node-connection assignment previously discussed with respect to FIGS. 62, 63A, 63B, 64, 65, 66A, and 66A and Tables 1-6. The order in which the decision blocks 1810, 1830, and 1840 occur can vary from that shown in FIG. 69, so that any of these blocks can be first, second or third with respect to the other blocks. In block 1800, wavelengths are assigned to different pairs of node connections as each node connection is established. Following block 1800, in block 1810 the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the node of which the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) is a part, the network of which the node is a part, the user of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the user of the node, or the user of the network decides whether to use intelligent wavelength assignment. This intelligent wavelength assignment can be the same as or different from the intelligent wavelength assignment discussed earlier in connection with Tables 5 and 6. If the answer is yes, in block 1880, supported wavelengths are assigned to different pairs of node connections as they are established to prevent consecutive wavelengths in the set of supported monotonically increasing wavelength values from being transmitted on FWM-producing optical fiber according to one or more intelligent-wavelength-assignment algorithms. If the answer is no, block 1820 follows. In block 820, wavelengths are assigned to different pairs of node connections as each node connection is established in ascending or descending numerical order of the wavelength values in the set, or in some other arbitrary or random order. Next, block 830 follows, in which the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the node of which the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) is a part, the network of which the node is a part, the user of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the user of the node, or the user of the network decides whether the node connection to which wavelengths are being assigned is capable of producing FWM. If the answer is no, the wavelength assignments are maintained in block 1860. If the answer is yes, block 1840 follows. In block 1840, the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the node of which the ROADM (or other optical element or elements) is a part, the network of which the node is a part, the user of the ROADM (or other optical element or elements), the user of the node, or the user of the network decides whether two pairs of bidirectional fiber are used on the FWM-producing fiber connection and whether multi-degree ROADMs (or other optical element or elements) are used on the nodes connected by the FWM-producing fiber. If the answer is yes, the multi-degree ROADMs (or other optical element or elements) are used to separately transmit even and odd optical signals whose wavelength values correspond, respectively, to even and odd numbered members of the supported wavelength set in block 1870. If the answer is no, the wavelengths of the input signals are changed by one or more ROADMs or another optical element or elements that perform the same or similar function, connected to the network to increase the wavelength spacing of output optical signals output to the FWM-producing fiber by 1) wavelength reassignment at the end nodes of a connection including the FWM-producing fiber to change the wavelength, or 2) wavelength translation using intermediate nodes of a connection including the FWM-producing fiber to change the wavelength.

The example embodiments of the invention (i.e., optical elements 24, 30, 36, 44, 52, 58, 64, 70, etc., ROADMs 10, 102, etc., network elements 104, 120, 180, etc., networks 190, 276, 1100, 1200, etc., spur add ons 210, 220, etc., and blocks 1600-1880 or any part(s) or function(s) thereof) may be implemented using hardware, and/or a combination of hardware and software and may be implemented in one or more computer systems or other processing systems. Any manipulations performed by these example embodiments commonly associated with mental operations performed by a human operator do not need such a human. Rather, the operations may be completely implemented with machine operations. Useful machines for performing the operation of the example embodiments presented herein include general purpose digital computers or similar devices.

Any of the optical elements, ROADMs, network elements, and networks discussed above can contain a central processing unit (CPU) to instruct the performing of any of the functions noted above or can contain an element (or elements) that performs (or perform) the same or similar function. From a hardware standpoint, a CPU typically includes one or more components, such as one or more microprocessors, for performing the arithmetic and/or logical operations required for program execution, and storage media, such as one or more disk drives or memory cards (e.g., flash memory) for program and data storage, and a random access memory, for temporary data and program instruction storage. From a software standpoint, a CPU typically includes software resident on a storage media (e.g., a disk drive or memory card), which, when executed, directs the CPU in performing transmission and reception functions. The CPU software may run on an operating system stored on the storage media, such as, for example, UNIX or Windows (e.g., NT, XP, Vista), Linux, and the like, and can adhere to various protocols such as the Ethernet, ATM, TCP/IP protocols and/or other connection or connectionless protocols. As is well known in the art, CPUs can run different operating systems, and can contain different types of software, each type devoted to a different function, such as handling and managing data/information from a particular source, or transforming data/information from one format into another format. It should thus be clear that the embodiments described herein are not to be construed as being limited for use with any particular type of server computer, and that any other suitable type of device for facilitating the exchange and storage of information may be employed instead.

Although for convenience the above discussion refers to a single CPU, in other example embodiments CPU may include plural separate CPUs, wherein each is dedicated to a separate application, such as, for example, a data application, a voice application, and a video application.

Software embodiments of the example embodiments presented herein may be provided as a computer program product, or software, that may include an article of manufacture on a machine accessible or machine readable medium having instructions. The instructions on the machine accessible or machine readable medium may be used to program a computer system or other electronic device. The machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, floppy diskettes, optical disks, CD-ROMs, and magneto-optical disks or other type of media/machine-readable medium suitable for storing or transmitting electronic instructions. The techniques described herein are not limited to any particular software configuration. They may find applicability in any computing or processing environment. The terms “machine accessible medium” or “machine readable medium” used herein shall include any medium that is capable of storing, encoding, or transmitting a sequence of instructions for execution by the machine and that cause the machine to perform any one of the procedures described herein. Furthermore, it is common in the art to speak of software, in one form or another (e.g., program, procedure, process, application, module, unit, logic, and so on) as taking an action or causing a result. Such expressions are merely a shorthand way of stating that the execution of the software by a processing system causes the processor to perform an action to produce a result.

While various example embodiments of the present invention have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example, and not limitation. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant arts that various changes in form and detail can be made therein. Thus, the present invention should not be limited by any of the above described example embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.

In addition, it should be understood that the FIGS. 1-69 are presented for example purposes only. The architecture of the example embodiments presented herein is sufficiently flexible and configurable, such that it may be utilized (and navigated) in ways other than that shown in the accompanying figures.

Further, the purpose of the foregoing Abstract is to enable the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and the public generally, and especially the scientists, engineers and practitioners in the art who are not familiar with patent or legal terms or phraseology, to determine quickly from a cursory inspection the nature and essence of the technical disclosure of the application. The Abstract is not intended to be limiting as to the scope of the example embodiments presented herein in any way. It is also to be understood that the procedures recited in the claims need not be performed in the order presented. 

What is claimed is:
 1. An apparatus comprising: at least one reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer (ROADM) configured to operate in a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, and select either the first mode or the second mode in which to operate, receive, in the first mode, a plurality of wavelengths separated by a first wavelength spacing, and receive, in the second mode, a plurality of wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing or a greater wavelength spacing, output, in the first mode, a plurality of wavelengths to a network interface, separated by the first wavelength spacing, and output, in the second mode, a plurality of wavelengths to the network interface, at least a subset of which are separated by the greater wavelength spacing, thereby reducing the efficiency of four wave mixing cross products produced in a four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable when the fiber optic cable is connected to the network interface receiving the outputted wavelengths, compared to when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable receives outputted wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing.
 2. The apparatus recited by claim 1, wherein the fiber optic cable is at least one of NZDSF and DSF optical fiber cables.
 3. The apparatus recited by claim 1, wherein the ROADM is configured to prevent no more than half the received wavelengths from being output to the network interface in the second mode when the ROADM receives a plurality of wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing.
 4. The apparatus recited by claim 1, wherein in the second mode the received wavelengths are represented by a set of monotonically increasing wavelength values, each wavelength value comprising either an even numbered or odd numbered member of the set of monotonically increasing wavelength values, the set of monotonically increasing wavelength values comprising alternating even and odd numbered members of increasing wavelength values, and the ROADM is configured to output to the network interface wavelengths corresponding to only the even or only the odd members of the set when the received wavelengths are separated by the first wavelength spacing.
 5. The apparatus recited by claim 1, further comprising another ROADM connected to the ROADM and also configured to operate in the first and second modes, wherein the ROADMs are configured to output in the second mode at least one subset of the plurality of wavelengths to the network interface separated by the greater wavelength spacing.
 6. The apparatus recited by claim 1, wherein the first wavelength spacing is equal to 100 GHz and the greater wavelength spacing is equal to 200 GHz.
 7. The apparatus recited by claim 1, wherein in the second mode when the ROADM receives wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing, the ROADM blocks at least one of the received wavelengths from being outputted to the network interface.
 8. The apparatus recited by claim 1, further comprising a control device configured to control whether the apparatus outputs the wavelengths in the first mode or the second mode.
 9. The apparatus recited by claim 8, wherein in the second mode the control device and the ROADM are configured to determine the wavelength spacings of the received and outputted wavelengths to reduce the efficiency of four wave mixing cross products of the outputted wavelengths with the greater wavelength spacing generated in fiber optic cable by at least an order of magnitude below the level of efficiency of four wave mixing cross products generated in the fiber optic cable when the wavelengths are output from the ROADM with the first wavelength spacing.
 10. The apparatus recited by claim 9, wherein the greater wavelength spacing is at least 200 GHz.
 11. The apparatus recited by claim 10, wherein the first wavelength spacing is 100 GHz.
 12. The apparatus recited by claim 1, wherein the apparatus is configured to set different bandwidths for different add ports of the ROADM inputting at least two adjacent wavelengths.
 13. The apparatus recited by claim 1, wherein the apparatus is configured to output pairs of adjacent wavelengths having different wavelength spacings.
 14. The apparatus recited by claim 1, further comprising a converter configured to convert at least one wavelength inputted into the ROADM into another wavelength to increase the wavelength spacing between the converted wavelength and an inputted adjacent wavelength to determine the greater wavelength spacing.
 15. An apparatus comprising: at least one converter arranged to perform an optical-electrical-optical conversion to at least one wavelength of a multi-wavelength optical signal, and to output a resulting converted wavelength; and a reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer (ROADM) configured to combine the resulting converted wavelength with at least one further wavelength from the multi-wavelength optical signal, wherein a spacing between the converted wavelength and the at least one further wavelength is greater than a spacing between at least two wavelengths of the multi-wavelength optical signal, thereby reducing the efficiency of four wave mixing cross products produced in a four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable is connected to a network interface of the ROADM receiving wavelengths having the spacing between the converted wavelength and the at least one further wavelength, compared to when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable receives wavelengths from the network interface of the ROADM separated by the spacing between the at least two wavelengths of the multi-wavelength optical signal.
 16. The apparatus recited by claim 15, further comprising a further ROADM configured to receive the multi-wavelength optical signal and to output the at least one wavelength to the converter.
 17. The apparatus recited by claim 16, wherein the multi-wavelength optical signal is a multiplexed optical signal, the further ROADM is configured to demultiplex the multiplexed optical signal into a plurality of wavelengths, the at least one converter is arranged to convert at least one of the wavelengths demultiplexed by the further ROADM into a different, converted wavelength, and the spacing between the different, converted wavelength and the at least one further wavelength is at least twice the spacing between at least two wavelengths of the multi-wavelength optical signal.
 18. The apparatus recited by claim 15, wherein the at least one converter is a bidirectional transponder.
 19. The apparatus recited by claim 17, wherein the ROADMs are connected to each other, and the at least one converter includes at least one transponder.
 20. The apparatus recited by claim 15, wherein the at least one converter includes a plurality of transponders, each configured to receive a different wavelength, to convert such wavelength, and output a corresponding converted wavelength to the ROADM, the ROADM combining converted wavelengths with the at least one further wavelength from the multi-wavelength optical signal.
 21. A procedure for controlling signal wavelengths comprising: selecting either a first mode or a second mode in which a reconfigurable add drop multiplexer (ROADM) operates; receiving with the ROADM a plurality of wavelengths separated by a first wavelength spacing and outputting from the ROADM a plurality of wavelengths to a network interface separated by the first wavelength spacing, when the first mode is selected; and receiving with the ROADM a plurality of wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing or a greater wavelength spacing and outputting from the ROADM a plurality of wavelengths to the network interface, at least a subset of which are separated by the greater wavelength spacing, when the second mode is selected, thereby reducing the efficiency of four wave mixing cross products produced in a four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable when the fiber optic cable is connected to the network interface receiving the outputted wavelengths, compared to when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable receives outputted wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing.
 22. A procedure for controlling optical signals of different wavelengths, comprising: performing an optical-electrical-optical conversion to at least one wavelength of a multi-wavelength optical signal, to output a resulting converted wavelength; and combining the resulting converted wavelength with at least one further wavelength from the multi-wavelength optical signal, wherein a spacing between the converted wavelength and the at least one further wavelength is greater than a spacing between at least two wavelengths of the multi-wavelength optical signal, thereby reducing the efficiency of four wave mixing cross products produced in a four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable receives wavelengths having the spacing between the converted wavelength and the at least one further wavelength, compared to when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable receives wavelengths separated by the spacing between the at least two wavelengths of the multi-wavelength optical signal.
 23. The procedure recited by claim 22, further comprising receiving the multi-wavelength optical signal from a network.
 24. The procedure recited by claim 23, wherein the multi-wavelength optical signal is a multiplexed optical signal and the procedure further comprises demultiplexing the multiplexed optical signal.
 25. The procedure recited by claim 22, wherein the performing includes performing an optical-electrical-optical conversion to a plurality of wavelengths of the multi-wavelength optical signal to provide converted wavelengths, and the combining includes combining the converted wavelengths and the at least one further wavelength.
 26. An apparatus comprising: at least one reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer (ROADM) configured to receive a plurality of wavelengths separated by a first wavelength spacing or a greater wavelength spacing, and output a plurality of wavelengths, at least a subset of which are separated by the greater wavelength spacing, to a fiber optic cable through a network interface when the received wavelengths are separated by the first wavelength spacing, and output a plurality of wavelengths, at least a subset of which are separated by the greater wavelength spacing, to a fiber optic cable through a network interface when the received wavelengths are separated by the greater wavelength spacing, thereby reducing the efficiency of four wave mixing cross products generated in the fiber optic cable when the fiber optic cable is a four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable, compared to when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable receives outputted wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing.
 27. The apparatus recited in claim 26, wherein the apparatus further comprises a control device configured to control the wavelength spacing of the received wavelengths.
 28. The apparatus recited in claim 27, wherein the control device is configured to determine the number of add ports of the ROADM into which wavelengths are added to the ROADM to determine that the received wavelengths are separated by the greater wavelength spacing.
 29. The apparatus recited in claim 27, wherein the control device is configured to determine the wavelengths added to the add ports of the ROADM to determine that the received wavelengths are separated by the greater wavelength spacing.
 30. The apparatus recited in claim 26, wherein when the ROADM receives wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing, the ROADM is configured to block selected wavelengths inputting into the ROADM from being outputted from the ROADM to output at least the subset of the plurality of wavelengths separated by the greater wavelength spacing.
 31. The apparatus recited in claim 26, further comprising a converter device configured to convert at least one wavelength inputted into the ROADM into a different wavelength to be outputted from the ROADM when the ROADM receives wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing, to output at least the subset of the plurality of wavelengths separated by the greater wavelength spacing.
 32. The apparatus recited in claim 26, wherein the first wavelength spacing is 100 GHz and the greater wavelength spacing is at least 200 GHz.
 33. An apparatus comprising: at least one reconfigurable optical add drop multiplexer (ROADM) configured to receive a plurality of wavelengths separated by a first wavelength spacing; and a first converter configured to convert at least one of the received wavelengths to another wavelength to increase the wavelength spacing of the converted at least one wavelength with respect to another received wavelength, wherein the ROADM is configured to receive the converted at least one wavelength and to output a plurality of wavelengths, including the converted at least one wavelength, separated by a greater wavelength spacing than the first wavelength spacing, to a network interface, thereby reducing the efficiency of four wave mixing cross products produced in a four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable is connected to the network interface and receives from the ROADM outputted wavelengths separated by a greater wavelength than the first wavelength spacing, compared to when the four-wave-mixing-cross-product-producing fiber optic cable receives wavelengths separated by the first wavelength spacing.
 34. The apparatus recited by claim 33, further comprising a second converter configured to convert a different received wavelength from the first converter.
 35. The apparatus recited by claim 33, further comprising second, third, and fourth converters, wherein the first and second converters together comprise a first pair of converters, wherein the third and fourth converters together comprise a second pair of converters, and wherein each pair of converters converts a different wavelength.
 36. The apparatus recited by claim 33, further comprising a further ROADM, wherein the ROADM is configured to transmit at least one received wavelength to the converter and transmits other received wavelengths to the further ROADM, wherein the converter transmits the converted at least one wavelength to the further ROADM, and wherein the further ROADM is configured to combine the converted at least one wavelength and the other wavelengths received from the ROADM to generate combined wavelengths having the greater wavelength spacing and to output the combined wavelengths having the greater wavelength spacing to the network interface.
 37. The apparatus recited by claim 33, wherein the ROADM is configured to output pairs of adjacent wavelengths having different wavelength spacings.
 38. The apparatus recited by claim 33, wherein the apparatus is configured to operate in a first mode and a second mode, wherein in the first mode, the output plurality of wavelengths are output from the ROADM at the first wavelength spacing, and wherein in the second mode, the output plurality of wavelengths are output at the greater wavelength spacing. 